


*+ 









o. 










V» » 4 






W 



^ ■*+. 



% * . . 1 



^ 



^ <V 




X> tf 






V 
^ P 



50' 










o Or 






I >" v^ 















A -r 






** 






i 









■ 



' 
























r> 






' 



C 0" 



V 















s - 






. 



<P V 



\ 






Ik 
















Y * 



''iii' 



EXERCISES 



IN 



SOME OF THE MORE DIFFICULT PRINCIPLES 



OF 



GEEEK SYNTAX 



WITH REFERENCES 

TO THE GRAMMARS OF CROSBY, CURTIUS, GOODWIN, HADLEY, 
KOCH, AND KUHNER. 



A SEQUEL TO 

JONES'S EXERCISES IN GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION, 

AND 

INTENDED FOR THE FIRST YEAR IN COLLEGE. 



JAMES E. BOISE, Ph.D., 

PROFESSOR IN THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO 



CHICAGO : 
S. C. GRIGGS AND COMP 
1874. 






^>f\% 



V 



>' 



Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1874, 

BY S. C. GRIGGS & CO., 

in the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at "Washington. 



University Press : Welch, Bigelow, & Co., 
Cambridge. 



rTO 
THE HON. J. Y. SCAMMOX, LL.D., 



PRESIDENT OF THE BOARD OF TRUSTEES OF THE 
UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO, 



THE PUBLIC-SPIRITED CITIZEN, AND THE GENEROUS PATRON 
OF LEARNING, 

£f)ts B&orfc is CnscribctJ 

AS A TOKEN OF HIGH RESPECT AND OF GRATITUDE 
FOR MANY FAVORS, 

BY THE AUTHOR. 



PREFACE. 



The following exercises were prepared as a second part 
to Jones's Greek Prose Composition. Consequently, much 
of the knowledge which the learner has had an opportunity 
to acquire in the study of that work is here presupposed. 
Many grammatical references and explanations are omitted 
which would be in place in a more elementary work.- The 
student, before entering college, has learned to use his 
grammar, and knows where to find the leading topics. It 
is better for him that he should begin, at least, to examine 
points on which he is doubtful by the aid of his own judg- 
ment, without too much assistance either from his exercise- 
book or from his teacher ; and if he will provide himself 
with several of the grammars referred to at the beginning 
of each lesson and consult them carefully, comparing the 
statements of different writers on the same point, he will 
find it very greatly to his advantage. I know of no way 
in which he can more rapidly and surely build up the most 
complete and thorough scholarship. 

The grammars to which references are made are all well 
known in this country, except that of Koch. I have found 
this work of so much value in my own studies, that I have 
made references to it for the benefit of those who read Ger- 
man ; thinking, also, that I may possibly some day translate 
it for the use of those who do not read German. 



VI PKEFACE. 

The examples which precede each exercise have been 
selected with a good deal of care. The larger number are 
taken from Demosthenes and Plato, a less number from 
Xenophon, a few from Thucydides, and a very few from 
other sources ; all of them, however, from Attic writers. 
These examples cannot be studied too carefully nor imi- 
tated too closely. If the teacher, at the beginning of each 
lesson, would pronounce them, slowly and distinctly, clause 
by clause, and have the entire class translate in concert, it 
would prove a most useful exercise. 

The special vocabularies in each lesson are quite full ; 
and often words that have been previously used are re- 
peated. Yet no attempt has been made to give a full 
account of each word in every place where it occurs ; and 
frequent reference to the general vocabulary at the end of 
the book, also to the grammar and lexicon, will be indis- 
pensable. 

The oral exercises are intended to illustrate the princi- 
ples of each lesson as sharply and briefly as possible. 
These, also, as well as the examples, may be recited by the 
whole class in concert, while the teacher pronounces, some- 
times the Greek, sometimes the English. It is hoped that 
these oral exercises will prove to be a feature of much 
value ; yet the teacher should pass over them rapidly, with 
as much life as possible, and guard most carefully against 
occupying too much time in the preliminary work before 
entering on the principal exercise which is to be written 
on the blackboard. It is important for this last exercise 
that the class-room contain larp;e and convenient black 



: 



boards. 

The number of lessons is limited to thirty. This num- 
ber is thought to contain as much work of this character 
as the average Freshman class in an American college 



PKEFACE. Vll 

now requires. I should not recommend more than one 
lesson each week in this work ; and if the teacher would 
take some pains to dwell on the particular grammatical 
principles of each lesson beforehand, in connection with 
the other lessons of the week, this plan would give more 
unity and thoroughness to the entire work of the class. 

In the examination of sentences which have been cor- 
rectly written on the blackboard, the teacher is often in- 
terrupted and sometimes perplexed by the question, May 
not that sentence be written so and so ? that is, in some 
other way than the one which has just been approved. 
This -question generally proceeds from one or more of the 
best scholars in the class. It may be answered, once for 
all, in the affirmative. Nearly every sentence in the entire 
work may be expressed in several different ways, with a 
change of words and a change in the arrangement. It is 
not, however, recommended in general to ascertain in how 
many different ways a sentence may be expressed, but what 
is the best form of expression ; and in order to determine 
this point the examples preceding each exercise are the 
best possible guide. 

In the preparation of this work, valuable assistance has 
been rendered by Professor John C. Freeman, and by my 
daughter, Mrs. Alice Boise Wood ; both of whom have, for 
some years past, been engaged in teaching Greek in this 
University. 

These lessons have been prepared in the midst of en- 
grossing professional labors, with their attendant distrac- 
tions and interruptions. While I do not ask that the work 
shall pass for more than it is worth, I solicit for it on the 
part of the teachers of the country the same charitable 
consideration which they have accorded to all my previous 
works. "Amid so many risks of going wrong, it will be 



Vlll PREFACE. 

marvellous, indeed, if I have in all cases gone right. My 
eye may have slipped over errors ; my judgment, over 
graver faults." 

I cannot close without expressing my thanks to the 
University Press of Cambridge, Mass., for the pains taken 
to secure typographical beauty and accuracy ; and above 
all, to my publishers, Messrs. S. C. Griggs & Co. of this 
city, for their determination to spare no effort and no ex- 
pense to offer one of the best printed school-books to the 
American public. I should be fully satisfied if the subject- 
matter might prove worthy of so beautiful a dress. 

JAMES R. BOISE. 
University of Chicago, March, 1874. 



CONTENTS 



Page 
Arrangement of "Words in an Attic Prose Sentence . . xi 

Explanation of the Principal Abbreviations used in this 

Work xviii 

LESSON I. — Some Peculiarities in the Tenses of the In- 
dicative . . . .1 

LESSON II. — Tenses of the Dependent Moods ... 5 

LESSON III. — The Moods. 

Final and Object Clauses after I'm, wj, owus, fi-fi . . . .8 

LESSON IV. — The Moods {continued). 

Conditional Sentences 12 

LESSON V. — The Moods (continued). 

Conditional Sentences (continued) 16 

LESSON VI. — The Moods (continued). 

Conditional Sentences (continued) • . 20 

LESSON VII. — The Moods (continued). 

Conditional Sentences in Indirect Discourse . . . .24 

LESSON VIII. — Moods in Relative and Temporal Sentences 28 

LESSON IX. — Moods in Relative and Temporal Sentences 

(continued) 32 

LESSON X. — Moods in the Expression of a Wish . . 36 

LESSON XI. — Moods in Exhortations and Prohibitions . 40 

LESSON XII. —The Infinitive 44 

LESSON XIII. — The Infinitive (continued) .... 48 



X CONTENTS. 

LESSON XIV. — The Infinitive {continued) .... 53 
LESSON XV. — The Infinitive {continued) . . . 57 

LESSON XVI. —The Participle 61 

LESSON XVII. — The Participle {continued) ... 65 

LESSON XVIII. — The Participle {continued) .... 69 
LESSON XIX. — The Participle {continued) .... 73 

LESSON XX. — The Participle {continued) . . . .78 
LESSON XXI. — The Participle {continued) . . . . 82 

LESSON XXII. — Verbal Adjectives in reos and reov . .86 
LESSON XXIII. — Interrogative Sentences ... 90 

LESSON XXIV. — Negatives 94 

LESSON XXV. — Negatives {continued) 98 

LESSON XXVI. — Two or more Negatives in one Sentence 102 
LESSON XXVII. — Some Negative Phrases . . * . .106 
LESSON XXVIII. — Principal Uses of ws, wairep, (bare . Ill 
LESSON XXIX. — The Principal Illative Conjunctions . 116 
LESSON XXX. — The Principal Intensive Particles . 122 



AN ENGLISH - GREEK VOCABULARY 129 



ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS IN AN ATTIC 
PROSE SENTENCE. 



L THE COMMON ORDER. 
A. Simjrte Sentence. 

1. The subject stands first; the predicate (whether a verb 
alone, or etvai with substantive or adjective) stands last. The 
attributive follows the subject, the object precedes the predicate ; 
e.g. Kvpos, 6 j3aai\evs: <$a\ios 'EparoicXeidov, KoptvOios yevos, 
Phalius a son of Eratoclldes, a Corinthian by birth : ol Kepuvpaloi 
tt}v Ik ere Lav ovk edt^amo, the Corcyrceans did not receive the 
petition. 

2. When several object-clauses belong to one verb, the prin- 
cipal object stands next before the verb ; the other objects pre- 
cede this, the one most intimately connected with the principal 
object next to it, then the others according to the degree of their 
connection with the principal object; e. g. ol "EWrjve s rovs Uep- 

aas ivUrjaav : ol "EWrjves iv MapaQwvi rovs Uepaas ivUrjaav \ ol 
"EXkrjves ravrrj rrj rjpipa iv MapaSaivi tovs nipaas ivUrjaav. 

3. Aii adverb of place or of time commonly precedes an ob- 
ject in the form of a substantive, with or without a preposition 
(rore or ravrrj rfi fjpepa tovs Uepo-as iviKrjaav) : the person pre- 
cedes the thing; the dative, the accusative (rbv nalba rrjv ypap.- 
paTinrjv 8i8aaK(o : ra> na ib\ (3 tj3\iov St'Sco/ii) : the adverb of time 

precedes the adverb of place (rore or ravrrj rfj r)pepa iv Mapa- 

6a>vi rovs n. ivUrjo-av) ; an adverb of manner, however, commonly 
stands directly before the verb, eA^en between the principal ob- 
ject and the verb ; e. g. ol "EXXrjve s ravrrj rrj rjpepa iv Mapadcovt. rovs 
Hepcras naXais ivUrjaav. 



xii ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS 

B. Compound Sentence. 

Subordinate clauses in general follow the order of those words, 
whether substantive, adjective, or adverb, in place of which they 
logically stand ; e. g. 6 dvpeopos, oo"irep elcoOei vTraKovetv, einf 
irepipeveiv. The porter, the one who teas accustomed to be in at- 
tendance, bade US wait. c O be Kvpos, ev cp avveXeyovro, tOvero. 
Yet subordinate substantive sentences, even when they express 
the grammatical subject, usually stand after the verb ; e. g. Xeyet 
on rj^ei '. vivo^ria vv on ayet, Trpos /3acriXea. 

II. INVERTED ORDER. 

A. Simple Sentence. 

1. In the inverted order, the predicate precedes the subject; 
and the attributive, the substantive to which it belongs ; e. g. '«/ 

picrco yap fj8r) kcItoi Tavra ra ayaOa aBXa: dyaBos 6 dvrjp '. 6 
fiacriXevs Kvpos: rrjs dperrjs t6 <d\\os. On the order hand, in 
the inverted order, the object stands after the predicate, aud the 
adverb after the word which it qualifies ; e. g. 'E^eiS;) 8e eirvBovro 
ol Kepicvpaioi rfju napacr Kevrjv: dvdpeias irdvv: fieXrlovs 7roXv. 

2. When special attention is to be drawn to the subject, it 

stands last ; e. g. ravrov poi ebo^av e^fti/ dpdprnpa, oirep Kai ol ttou)- 

rai, /cat ol dyaBol brjpiovpyoi. TJie good artisans also seemed 
to me to have the same fault as the poets. When two words 
are to be made prominent in a sentence, one of fhem stands first, 

the other last ; e. g. Xe'nrovo-i brj Ka\ tov X6(f>ov ol Imrels. 

3. In general, the first and the last places in a sentence are 
to be regarded as emphatic, when they are occupied by words 
which do not regularly belong there; e. g. oudap&s eyco Trpode- 
8axa tt)v els vpds evvoiav, in no manner have I abandoned good- 
will towards you. The common grammatical order would be, 
eyo) rrjv els vpds evvoiav ovbapas TrpobebcoKc. 

B. Compound Sentence. 

1. In the subordinate clauses, inversion is very frequent, 
owing to various causes, — emphasis, perspicuity, euphony, and 
the connection of the sentence with what precedes and follows. 



IN AN ATTIC PROSE SENTENCE. Xlll 

Thus declarative sentences and final sentences often precede the 
governing verb ; and relative sentences, those containing the an- 
tecedent. 

2. When a word belonging to a subordinate sentence is to be 
made specially prominent, it may precede the conjunction or the 
relative which would regularly begin the sentence ; e. g. elftevai 
de xph •«•>** TG>v peylarroov Kivdvvcov on Kal. . . peyicrrai ripal 
ireptyiyvovTu. And it is necessary to know that, from the great- 
est dangers, the greatest honors also result : op&vras Kal tovs 
o-rparriyovs, . . . , ola TreTiovOaariv : lit. seeing the generals, also, . . . , 
what they have suffered ; instead of opavras ola kcu ol o-Tpar-qyol 
nenovdao-iv. 

3. In connected discourse, it is a favorite arrangement to 
place at the beginning of a sentence that word which is most 
intimately connected with the thought of the preceding sen- 
tence ] e. g. Kal 6 "Eaxpar^s fiXeyjfas els tov Kptroova ■ T £2 Kpircov, 
e(pr], dnayayera tls ravrrjv oXkukc. Kal ravrrjv pev drrrjyov rives t<ov 
tov Kpirtovos (3oa>o~dv re Kal KoirTopevqv. 

4. In like manner, two words of similar or of opposite mean- 
ing are often brought together in the same sentence ; e. g. Kairoi 
oamsTw vnb tcov noXepicov 7rep(p6evTi povos povco avvrjet ktc. De Cor. 
137. roiav6 v eXiaacov Ijvvtov o~x°^f) Tamils. Antig. 231. KaXos 
ovv av pot 6 j3ios €?i) . . . dXXrjv e£ SiXXrjs tvoXlv noXeccs dpeiftopevco. 
Plat. Apol. 37, d. So also, dXXos aXXo, alius aliud; dXXos aXXoOi, 
alius alibi ; dXXos dXXoo-e, alius alio, etc. 

5. Of a similar character is the so-called chiasmus, in which 
two connected words are followed by two connected words of 
opposite meaning in the inverse order ; e. g. ttoXXcikls fjdovr] fipa- 
X^ta paKpav riKTei Xv7tt]v. 



III. SOME SPECIAL RULES. 
1. Position of the Article. 
(a.) The article is often separated from its substantive by 

small words, as pev, pev yap, pev ovv, 8e, S' ovv, ye, 8e ye, re, re yap, 

roi, toiwv, ydp, dr;, apa ; also by olpai : sometimes by long clauses ; 
e. g. rrjv pev 7rpo(pao~iv, fj de pf)Trjp, 6 pev ovv ivpecrfivTepos, rrj d' ovv 



XIV ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS 

arpana, Kai tup nap eavTa* be j3ap(3dpa>p, top e< tu>p 'EWrjveou 
els tovs fiapQdpovs qbofiop, are. When a preposition stands be- 
fore the article, the prose arrangement is either -rrpbs be top cipbpa, 
or 7rp6? top tipcipa be (not ttpos top be apbpa. The last arrangement 
is, however, allowed in the poets), dno t* Tr)s r)bopr)s, nepi re Tr)s 
noXecos. ISTot nnfrequently, two, or even three, articles in differ- 
ent forms follow one another, as, tclt^stwp noXXcbp fax^s oppara, 
the eyes of the soul of the many. 

(b.) The position and meaning of the attributive adjective 
(6 dyados dpfjp, or 6 dpyp 6 dyados, or dvfjp 6 dyados) and of the predi- 
cate adjective (dyadbs 6 dpi)p or 6 dpr)p dyados) are explained in 
all the grammars. 

(c.) The adnominal genitive, like an adjective, takes either 
the attributive or the predicate position ; as, 6 tup 'Adrjpaiap brj- 
pos, or 6 brjpos 6 t5>p 'Adrjpaieop, in which arrangement the empha- 
sis is on the genitive, the people of the Athenians ; 6 brjpos tcop 
'AOrjpalcou, or twp 'Adrjvaiap 6 brjpos, in which arrangement the em- 
phasis lies on the governing substantive, the peojole of the Athe- 
nians (in distinction from the aristocracy or from the government). 

(d.) The adjective pronoun follows the same rule as the attribu- 
tive adjective ; e. g. 6 epos naTr)p, or 6 naTrjp 6 epos. 

(e.) The genitive of the personal pronoun takes the predicate 
position ; as, 6 iraTrjp pov, 6 naTr)p crov, 6 7raTt)p avrov, or avTov 6 
irarrip. The enclitic genitives may also stand before the article, 
when a word in close logical connection precedes ; as, eqbr) pov 6 

iraTrjp, eqbr] aov 6 narrjp; but not pov 6 7raTr)p, aov 6 naTr)p at the 

beginning of a sentence ; epov 6 naTrjp or 6 7raTr)p epov is a form 
of expression which is said not to occur. 

(/.) The genitive of the reflexive pronouns, on the other hand, 
takes the same position as the adjective pronoun in Attic Greek ; 
as 6 epavTov (aeavTov, eavTov) 7raTr)p, my own (thine own, his own) 
father. In later Greek, as in the New Testament, the order 

6 7raTr)p eavTov is COnimon. 

2. Position of the Negatives. 

The regular place for oi> or pi) is directly before the word which 
it negatives; e. g. ol be naPTes pep ovk rjXdop,' Apialos be Kre.) oi 



IN AN ATTIC PROSE SENTENCE. XV 

yap (TTpariatTaL ovk e'cpacrav Uvai tov rrpocrco. When the negative 
stands before an article, a relative, a conjunction, a preposition, 
and sometimes before other parts of speech, some antithesis is 
commonly implied or expressed, e. g. opoXoyolrjv av eycoye ov Kara 
tovtovs elvai prjTcop, I should acknowledge that I am an orator, 
not after their sort (sc. but of quite a different sort) ; piadcoOrjvaL 
Se ovk inl tovtco ecpaaav, and they affirmed that they were hired 
not for this purpose (sc. but for quite a different one) ; ev ols (kol- 

pois) ov % ocra ej3ovX6peSa, ciXX' ocra dolrj to. npdpaT edet Be^ej-0ai, in 

which it was necessary to accept, not all that we wanted, but all 
that the circumstances would grant. 

Sometimes a special emphasis is given to the negative by 
throwing it to the end of the sentence ; e. g. ov y elbov ovde-iroiiroTe, 
whom I have seen never ; oXolto pip pi], may he not perish ! 

In conditional sentences, the negative prj stands regularly in the 
condition directly after el or edv, the negative ov at the beginning 
of the conclusion; e. g. ovk av rbv eavTov 7tot€ oikov koX&s tis oIkt]- 
creiev, el pfj iravra e'laerai hv wpoo-deerai, one could never regulate 
well his own house, unless he knows everything that he needs. 
Ovk av enoirjcrev 'Ayaaias ravra, el pf) eyco avrov eKeXevcra. 

3. Position of av. 

• (a.) With a conjunction or relative pronoun and the subjunc- 
tive mood, av stands usually next after the conjunction or the 
relative; as, os av, oaTts av, ivpXv av, oTav = oT av, e7reibdv=e7reidr) 
av, endv = ine\ av. Sometimes, however, a small word or two may 
stand between the conjunction or relative and av; as, 8e, re, pev, 
yap; e. g. ecus pev av, Xen. Anab., 1, 4, 8. 

(6.) In a principal sentence, with a past tense of the indica- 
tive, with the optative, infinitive, or participle, av stands usually 
just after the verb ; as, eXvov av, Xvoipi av. Yet it may stand after 
another word, which is to be made emphatic ; e. g. Plat. Cr. 53, c. 

Ka\ ovk o'iei acrx^pov av <pavelcr6ai to tov 2a>KpdTovs npaypa; and do 

you not think the conduct of Socrates will appear unseemly ? It 
is joined regularly to the negatives and to interrogative words ; 

as, ovk av, ov& av, ovttot av. tis av, t'i civ, tl 6' civ, tl 8rJT av, na>s av, 
7rcoj yap av, ottcos av, no'ios av, Snows av, ap av, ktL ; also to adverbs 



XVI ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS 

of time, place, manner, etc. ; e. g. tot av, kvTavff dv, cIkotcos dv, taas 

dv, rjKLCTT dv, KTe. 

(c.) Expressions like olpai, ecprj, ktL are often placed between 
av and the verb to which it belongs : e. g. Plat. Sympos., 
202, d. rt ovv av, ecprjv, etr] 6 "Epcos; what then, said I, would 
Eros be 1 

(d.) In certain connections, av with the optative, or indicative 
of a past tense, is transferred from a dependent clause, with 
which it logically belongs, and placed in the principal sentence. 
This occurs particularly in the expression, ovk olb' av el : e. g. ovk 

ot'S' av el 7reiaaipi; instead of ovk ot'S' el neio~aipi av, I don't know 
whether I should persuade \ ovk old' av el eKTT)(rdpr)v nalbd nore 
toiovtov, I don't know whether I should ever have acquired such 
a son. 

(e.) Although the adverb av can never stand first in its sen- 
tence, yet, in certain parenthetical clauses, av with the optative 
may be first in its clause, as hi the phrase, av tis elnoi, av tis (pair/, 
av to-cos fair]. Such clauses were so closely connected with the 
rest of the sentence as not to require any separation from it by 
commas, and then av appeared, as usual, postpositive ; e. g. tL 
ovv av tis e'iiroL uv ypdcpeis ktL, why then, one might say, do you 
continue to propose, etc. With the common punctuation (tL ovv, 
av tls e'Lnoi, av ypdcpeis KTe.), av appears as first in its clause (pre- 
positive). 

4. Position of \Uv and St 

Regularly pev and be are joined to those words which are anti- 
thetical. To this rule, however, there are many exceptions. 
When two words are closely united in meaning, pev and be 
often stand between them, as tj} pev izapao-Kevfj — , ttj be jva^rj; 
often, also, after both words, as toU o-ap-ao-iv p.ev...., ttj yvapji 
be', ev be&a pev....,ev dpiaTepa be. When a substantive with- 
out the article is governed by a preposition, de takes usually 
the third place ; as, bid pev koMos . . . . bid bvvapiv be ; less frequently 
the second place ; as, din be cppovrjo-iv. When the substantive ex- 
pressions, 6 pev, 6 be, are governed by a preposition, pev and be 
stand regularly after the preposition ; as, ev pev dpa toIs o-axppovov- 
pev, ev be toIs ov, in some things we are discreet, in others not ; 



IN AN ATTIC PROSE SENTENCE. • XV11 

els fiev tovs v(3pl£ovr€s, rots be dovXevovres, towards some persons 
insolent, towards others servile. 

Note. The above rules are collected mainly from Kuhner's Ausfuhrliche 
Grammatik der griechischen Sprache, Zweite Auflage, in durcliaus neuer 
Bearbeitung. Hannover, Hahn'sche Hofbuchhandlung, 1870. I am aware 
that on one important point, the relative position of the verb and its object, 
the rule above given differs from the statement on the same point in the 
learned, elaborate, and very valuable essay of Professor Charles Short, 
LL.D., "On the Order of Words in Attic Greek Prose," prefixed to the 
English-Greek Lexicon by C. D. Yonge, published by Messrs. Harper & 
Brothers, New York. The point is one on which there is ground, perhaps, 
for different opinions ; yet, after some examination of the Attic prose 
writers, I am constrained to agree with Kiihner in regard to the usual — 
perhaps I may say normal — order. I have found in the writings of Xeno- 
phon a much larger number of instances in which the object follows the 
verb than in those of the authors preceding and following him, Thucydides 
and Demosthenes for example ; yet even in Xenophon, I think, the number 
of instances in which the object precedes the verb preponderates over those 
in which the object follows it ; and hence I have given the rule in the 
above form. 



EXPLANATION OF THE PRINCIPAL ABBREVIATIONS 

USED IN THIS WORK. 



Att Attic. 

cf. Latin confer = compare, see. 

cogn cognate. 

comm common or commonly. 

const construction. 

Cr Crosby's Greek Grammar. 

Curt ■ . Curtius's " 

enclit enclitic. 

e. g exempli gratia, for example. 

ff. and the following. 

fr from. 

Good Goodwin's Greek Grammar. 

Had Hadley's 

Had. El " Elements of the Greek Language. 

Koch Griechische Grammatik, von Dr. Ernst Koch. 

Kiih Runner's Greek Grammar. 

kt€ /ecu rd €T€pa = et cetera. 

Lat 'Latin. 

lit literal or literally. 

perh perhaps. 

sc scilicet, understood. 

st instead of. 

usu usual or usually. 

w with. 

The remaining abbreviations, as gen., ace, ind., for genitive, accusative, 
indicative, are so common as to require no explanation. 



EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 



LESSOR I. 

SOME PECULIARITIES IN THE TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. 
References. 

Good., §§ 200, 205. Kim., §§ 255, 256. 

Had., 697 - 713. Koch, §§ 97 - 99, 103. 

Had. EL, 473 - 485. Cr., § § 594 ff. 

Curt., §§ 486-488, 492-494, 502-505. 

Examples. 

1. dcBco/jul <rofc, w Kvpe, ravrrjv yvvaL/ca, €/jlt)v ovaav 
6 vy are pa. I offer you, Cyrus, this (person), being a daugh- 
ter of mine, (as) a wife. 

2. Heir eta fjuat eyco e/ccov elvai /LL7]$eva aSifcelv avOpw- 
7tgl>v. I am persuaded that I have voluntarily wronged no 
one among men. 

3. Airay yeWere ApiaiM, otl rj/xet^ vacwfjuev fiacrCkea 
teal ov&eis tj/jlIv ere p,dye~ai. Announce to Ariseus that 
we have conquered the king, and that no one longer fights 
with us. 

4. EiretOov avrovs, Kai ou? eireta-a, tovtovs e^cov eiro- 
pevofxrjv. I tried to persuade them, and with those whom 
I (actually) persuaded, T proceeded. 

5. A ie<f>6 eipov TrpoGiovre? tovs (TTpaTicoTas, Kai kva 

1 A 



2 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

ye \oxaybv Siecpdeipav. Coming up, they tried to corrupt 
the soldiers, and they succeeded in corrupting a single 
captain. 

6. Ac ifkelaraL 7ro\e£? ir poar drrova 1 Toh 7ro\tTeu<? 
jjlt) KkeirreLv • t)v he rt? tovtcov tl Trapaftaivi), tyifilav avrol? 
eireOeaav. Most cities enjoin on their citizens not to 
steal ; and if any one of these transgresses at all, they are 
in the habit of inflicting a penalty on him (lit. on them, 
referring to the indefinite tW). 

7. Ta<? Toiavras ayvwfioavva^ vo/jll^ojv gvvovglciis av 
rrraveadai tJ/cgo. I am come supposing such misunder- 
standings might be stopped by familiar conversations. 

8. JlXeere ev6a Brj eir l6v fielre* irdXat. You are 
sailing (to that very place) where you have long been de- 
siring (to sail). 

* Xen. Anab. 7, 6, 37. The reading in Kriiger's edition. 
Vocabulary. 

Offer, diBojxi, to give ; offer, or Have conquered, am victori- 
try to give ; offer (in the pres. ous over, vucai (ao>). 

& imperf.) Soldier, o-rpartoiT^s, ov, 6. 

Daughter, Ovyarqp, rpos, rj. King, (BaaiXevs, eW, 6. 

How much, noaos, 77, ov. Persuade, ireLBa), try to per- 

Money, xpW aT ^ <ov, to., suade, pres. & impf. 

Am persuaded, irene iarp.ai, pf. March, nopevopai ; march 
pass, of Tret&a. against, nopevofiat eni, W. ace. 

Have -wronged, injured, abma Come up, come towards, 717300- 

Voluntarily, etctbv eivai ; plur. Corrupt, 8ia(p0eipa> ; try to cor- 
eicovTcs duai. rupt, pres. & impf. 

Man, human being, avOpmnos, Captain, Xoxayos, ov, 6. 

ov, 6. Most, 7rXe7oroi, sup. of noXvs- 

Announce, dnayyfXXeo (an 6, ay- City, noXts, eas, f). 

yeXXa). Inflict, eniri6r)fit (in I, Tidrjpi). 

Ariaeus, 'Aptatoy, ov, 6. Penalty, a fine, £i]p.ia, as, 17. 

Cyrus, Kvpos, ov, 6. Citizen, noXirrjs, ov, 6. 



LESSON I. 



No one, ovbeis, W. infin. fxrjbeis. 

Any one, ris ; anything, t\. 

Steal, KkeirTco. 

Am come, ijuv. 

Long (adv.), long ago, ndXai. 

Desire, iinOvpai (ea>). 

Stop, put a stop to, naveiv. 

Misunderstanding, dyvoop.oavvri, 
ijs, 17. 

Familiar conversations, inter- 
course, avvovaia, as, f}. 

Such, toiovtos, TotavTr], toiovto(v). 

Suppose, vofiifa. 

Sail, 7rXeco. 

"Where, evda ; intens. ev6a 8j), the 
very place where. 

Mention, make mention of, re- 
member, fiefivrjfxai. 



Formerly, 7rpoTcpov. 

Arise, come into being, yiyvo- 

pai. 
Well, honorably, KaXws. 

DO, 7TOIU) («<>)• 

Grgeci, "FXXrjves, 01. 
Proverbium, napoipla, as, 17. 
Am icus, <p(\os, ov, 6. 
Communis, kolvos, tj, ov ; also 6s, ov. 
Omnis, nets, nava, nav. 
Maximus, peyioros, rj, ov. 
Ornamentum, Kocrpos, ov, 6. 
Amicitia, cpikia, as, f). 
Tollo, depatpea, eo (dno, alpecd). 
Qui, os, fj, o ; oans, fjns, o ti (in- 
cludes anteced. & relat). 
Ex ea, e£ avrrjs. 
Verecundia, al8d>s, ovs, fj. 



Oral Exercise. 



H/cei, He is come. 
O'lxerai, He is gone. 
'EirXovre^ He was rich. 
' E7r\ovrrj(Tev, He became 

rich. 
'EfiaauXevev, He was king. 



Mifivri<Tfcei, He reminds. 
Me/jLvr)Tac, He remembers, 

makes mention of. 
Ke/cXrjTai, He is called. 
KeKrrjTac, He possesses. 
TleTTOiOev, He trusts. 



'EfiaalXevaev, He became Ilefofcev, He is by nature. 



king. 
*Hpx€v, He held office. 
'Hpgev, He obtained office. 
AiroQvr^GKu, He dies. 
TeOvrjtcev, He is dead. 
riyvercu, He becomes. 
TeyGvev, He is. 



"Eo-TTj/cev, He stands. 
* AiroXoSkev, He is ruined. 
OlBev, He knows. 
EccoOev, He is accustomed. 
"Eoucev, He is like, it is like, 

it seems. 
Aehoacev, He fears. 



4 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

Nlkol, He has conquered. ^fltxero, He was gone. 

'ASc/cel, He has wronged. 'E/ze/ui^To, He remembered. 

Qevyei,, He is banished. 'EireirolOeL, He trusted. 

*Hk<-v, He was come. 'EarrjKei,, He was standing. 

Note. These examples may easily be varied, if the teacher finds the 
requisite time, by changing the number, person, and in some instances the 
tense ; and to these examples some others may be added. 

To be Written. 

1. He offered to Cyrus his own daughter. 2. How 
much money did they offer to you ? 3. They are per- 
suaded that they have voluntarily wronged no one among 
men. 4. He announces to Ariseus that he has conquered 
the soldiers of the king. 5. He offered us money, and 
tried to persuade us to march against the king; and, to 
those whom he (actually) did persuade, he gave much 
money. 6. Coming up, they corrupted many soldiers ; 
and they tried to corrupt the captains also. 7. Most cities 
are in the habit of inflicting (aor. or pres.) a penalty on 
their citizens, if any one of these steals anything. 8. He 
is come announcing that our soldiers have conquered the 
king. 9. He is persuaded that he has wronged no one 
of his soldiers voluntarily. 10. He has long been desiring 
to put a stop to such misunderstandings by familiar con- 
versations. 11. He has long been supposing that such 
misunderstandings might be stopped by familiar conver- 
sations. 12. They are sailing (to that place) where they 
have long been desiring (to sail). 13. You make mention 
of the good men who have formerly arisen; and you do 
well. 14. In Grsecorum proverbio est; Amicorum esse 
communia omnia. 15. Maximum ornamentum amicitiae 
tollit, qui ex ea tollit verecundiam. 



LESSON II. 5 

LESSON II. 

TENSES OF THE DEPENDENT MOODS. 

References. 

Good., §§ 202-204. Kuh., § 257. 

Had., 714 - 718, 734 - 738. Curt., § 491, 495 - 50& 

Had. El., 486, 502-504. Cr., 590, a, 613. 
Koch, §§ 100, 101. 

Examples. 

1. 'H^lov Bodrjvai ol Tavras tcls 7ro\et? fiaWov yj 
Tio-aa<pepv7)v ap\eiv avrwv. He demanded that these 
cities be given to him, rather than that Tissaphernes con- 
tinue to rule over them. 

2. II poire /Lityas ep^Tjvea elirev, ore (3ov\q it o 8ia- 
Xe^Ofjvac rot? ap^ovai' rots Be o-TpctT7)yois eho^ev atcov- 
crac. Sending v forward an interpreter, he said that he 
wished to confer with the commanders ; and it seemed to 
the generals expedient to hear. 

3. BovXevov fjukv /SpaSeco?, eirireXeb Be ra^eco? ra 
Bo^avra. Deliberate slowly, but execute quickly your 
resolves (or those things which have seemed expedient). 

4. ( Oto) Boxei ravr , e(f>r), avareivciT u> ttjv yeipa. To 
whomsoever these things seem expedient, said he, let him 
raise his hand. 

o. 'HcBov kolI e%opevov, oirore ol iroXefjaoi b^eaOai 
avTovs e/uueWov. They sang and danced, whenever the 
enemy were about to see them. 

6. Xvvreybve fiot ra? airoKplaei^ kclI fipayyTepa? 
woiei, el /jueXXco vol eir eaOai. Cut short your replies to 
me and make them briefer, if I am to follow you. 

7. E$erjdr)o~av roov Meyapewv vavat acfras %v fi7r p o- 
irefjb^revv. They asked the Megarians to escort them 
with ships. 



6 



EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 



8. 'EvravOa Bepf???, ore Ik ttJ? e E\\doo$ rjTTrjdels 
T7) fiayy aireyctipei, Xejerac o lkoSo jay) or a l ravra ra (3a- 
oikeia. In that place, Xerxes, when conquered in the 
(well known) battle he was withdrawing from Greece, is 
said to have built this palace. 



Vocabulary. 



Give, didcofxi. In the pres. & 
it may mean to offer. 

Send forward, 7rponep,7ra>. 

Interpreter, ipp.r]vevs, ecus, 6. 

"Wish, 0ouAofiai ; not so strong as 
eTTiOvfxeco (eVi Ovpos), I set my 
heart upon, I desire earnest- 
ly ; stronger than e0e'Xa>, I am Dance, x°P* VQi - 
willing, I consent, I wish. Withdraw, anoxia, S. 



Penalty, fine, gnp-la, as, rj. 
Ask, request, deofiai, w. gen.; dep. 

pass. 
Defeated, to be, etc., rjrr(op.at 

(aop.ai) ; as pass, of vlkcloh. 

EsCOrt, (rvp.TTpOTTip.TT(0. 

Sing, aSoj. 



Carry into execution, execute, 

eVireXw (e'oo). 
Things determined, resolves, 

ra bof-avra. 
Demand, d£ia> (o'a>). 
Deliberate, fiovXevop-ai. 
Slowly, (3pabea>s. 
Quickly, raxecos- 
Confer with, 8ia\eyop.ai (dep. 

pass.). 
Hand, ^tip, xeipos, rj. 
Raise, stretch forth, di/areiW 
Enjoin on, 7rpooTarra>. 
Cut short, (rvvTefAva). 
Reply, aTTOKpiais, e<os, rj. 
Make, 7roia>, t<a. 

Brief, briefer, ppaxvs. ftpaxvrepos. 
Am to, am about to, /xe'XXco, w. 

pres. & fut. infin. 
Inflict, einTiOrjpLi. 



Build, oi/coSo/ieco, a>. 

Palace, (Saaikeia, ra. 

Moneo, ivopda>, a>, usu. const, ace. 

& particip. 
Ars, rexvT), ns, fj. 
Sine, avev, u: gen. 
Assiduitas, fniTrjdevais, etas, f). 
Dicendi, tov \eyetu. 
Multum, p.aXa. 
Iuvo, are, avpcpepeiv rivl. 
Malo, j3ovXop.ai paXkov, const, ace. 

w. infin. 
Sapiens, ao<pos, rj 6v. 
Hostis, 7ro\ep.ios, iov, 6. 
Metuo, dedntKa or SeStn, infin. 

deftievcu; <poj3eop.ai ovp.at. 
Quam, rj. 

Stultus, avorjTOSi ov. 
Civis, TroKirrjs, ov, 6. 
Laudo, (naiveo), £>. 



LESSON II. 7 

Oral Exercise. 

Elrzev ore drroOdvoi 6 IlepiKXrjs, He said that Pericles 
was dead. 

9 Eav nroif) tovto, If he do this (habitually). 

'Eav 7roLrjO"p tovto, If he do this. 

El Xeyot, If he should speak (habitually). 

El Xe^ecev, If he should speak. 

Aeye, Speak thou (habitually), or continue speaking, or 
go to speaking. 

Aegov, Speak thou. 

BovXerac Xeyecv, He wishes to speak (habitually). 

BovXerac Xegai, He wishes to speak. 

Ti)v Ovpav tcXele, Shut the door (habitually). 

Trjv Ovpav /cXeloov, Shut the door. 

Trjv Ovpav avoigov, Open the door. 

BovXerac rrjv Ovpav dvolgat, He wishes to open the door 

"EXeyev on ypd$oi, He said that he was writing. 

v EXeyev on ypdyjroi, He said that he would write. 

EXeyev on ypdyjretev, He said that he wrote. 

"EXeyev on yeypacpcos eorj, He said that he had written. 

$i~Ig\ ypdfetv. He says that he is writing. 

$7)cn ypdijreiv, He says that he will write. 

$r)o\ ypdyjrai, He says that he wrote. 

$r)o-l yeypa<f>evai, He says that he has written. 

"O rt 7roi,rio-oL, ov 8iea"rffjb7)v€y What he would do, he did 
not indicate. 

MeXXa) oyfreaOac ae, or peXXco opav o~e, I am about to 
see you. 

Note. The dependent moods do not denote time (but only the state of 
the action), except in indirect discourse. 

To be Written. 

1. He tried to persuade them to give these cities to him. 
2. They persuaded Cyrus to offer much money to the 
soldiers. 3. Sending forward an interpreter, they an- 



S EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

Bounced that they wished to carry into execution those 
things which had been determined. 4. We demanded 
that the generals deliberate slowly, but execute quickly 
their resolves. 5. He is persuaded that he has voluntarily 
wronged no one of the enemy who conferred (particip.) 
with him 6. He persuaded all to whom these things 
seemed expedient to raise their hands. 7. We enjoin on 
you to cut short your replies and to make them briefer, if 
we are to confer with you. 8. They are in the habit of 
inflicting a penalty on those who do not cut short (par- 
ticip.) their replies, and make them briefer. 9. They asked 
the generals to deliberate slowly and to execute their 
resolves quickly. 10. They are said to have been defeated 
in battle. 11. They are said to have asked the Megarians 
to escort them with ships. 12. They are said to have 
sung and danced, when, conquered in the (well known) 
battle, they were withdrawing. 13. He is said to have 
sung and danced, after having built this palace. 14. 
Moneo artem sine assiduitate dicendi non multum juvare. 
15. Malo, te sapiens hostis metuat, quam stulti cives lau- 
dent. 



LESSON III. 

THE MOODS. 

Final and Object Clauses after tva, «s, Sirws, |i4j. 

References. 

Good., §§ 215- 218. Kim., § 330. 

Bad., 739 - 743. Curt., § § 530 - 533. 

Had. EL, 507 - 510. Cr., § 624. 
Koch, § ill. 

Examples. 

1. Kvvas Tpe(/)et?, iva aoi tov$ \vkovs airb tcov irpo/3d- 
rwv a7repvK(ocrtv. You nourish dogs, that they may 
keep off for you the wolves from the sheep. 



LESSON III. 9 

2. Mevcov 6 @6TTaXo? $rj\o$ rjv hndvfiwv fiev ttXovtov 
t,o"^vpw<;, emOvficov he ap^euv, otto*? irXela) Xa/ifidvoi, 
eiriOvficov he Tifiaadcu, ova TrXecco Kephatvoi' <j)tXo<; tc 
eftovXero elvac to?? fieyiaTov SvvafievoLs, \va dhiKoav fir) 
h choir; Bl/crjv. Menon the Thessalian plainly desired 
riches exceedingly (lit. was plain desiring) ; and desired to 
rule, that he might receive more (money) ; and desired to 
be honored, that he might acquire more (money) ; and he 
wished to be a friend to those who had the most power, 
that, having done wrong, he might not suffer punishment 
(or give satisfaction). 

3. Ta irXola fcare/cavaev, Iva fir) Kvpos hiafifj. He 
had burned (aor. as plpf) the boats, that Cyrus might not 
cross over. 

4. Eyco fiev v/ias eiraivw, 07r&)? he /cat, vfiels efie eirai- 
veaere, ejnol fieX^aei. I praise you; but that you may 
praise me, will be my care. 

5. r Owcd? ravra firjheis avOpwircov irevcerai. (See) 
that no one among men ascertain these things. 

6. "IkCLVOS fypOVTlfav f)v 07TO)? 1^0 1 7) GTpaTlCL TCL €7TL- 

TrjBeca. He was able to take care that the army might 
have provisions. 

7. $o/3ovfiai fir) tovto ye^Tat. I fear that this may 
happen (Yereor ne accidat). e(j)o/3ovfir]v fir) tovto yevoi- 
t o 9 or ecfrofiovfirjv fir) tovto yevrjTat. I feared that this 
might happen. 

8. Mr) cnrevhe irXovTelv, fir) Tayy irevrfs yevy. Be not 
in haste to be rich, lest you become quickly poor. 

Vocabulary. 

Seems expedient, SokcI, jr. ho- Dog, kvcou, (two?, 6. 

K€(0, <5. Wolf, \l)KOS, ov, 6. 

Nourish, Tpe(pa>. Sheep, 7rpd/3ara, a>v, Ta. 

Many, ttoWoi ; much, 7ro\vs. Keep off, airepvK.a> (dno, cpvKw). 

Large, fxeyas. Plain, &7X0?, r], ov. 



10 



EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 



Friend, (p[\os, ov, 6. 

Most, greatest, especially, /xe- 

yiOTOV. 

To have power, to be able, 

bvuapat. 

Suffer punishment, give satis- 
faction, Sibovai diicr)V. 

Take care, (ppovrifa. 

Burn, KaraKaico. 

Boat, ttKoIov, ov, to. 

The enemy, ol iroXepioi. 

River, norapos, ov, 6. 

Cross over, Sia/3cuVa>. 

Army, aTparid, as, f). 

Provisions, e-mrrjdeia, <ov, rd. 

Fear, cpofiovpai, spoken of sudden 
and inconsiderate fear ; SedoiKa 
or 8edia, of deliberate and rea- 
sonable fear. 

Ascertain, TrvvOdvopai. 

Beware, imperat. of opdco, to see. 

Quickly, raxv or raxecos. 

To be in haste, o-rrevda. 



Become, ylyvopai. 

Poor, nivrjs, tjtos. As subst. or 

adj. 
Not, prj w. the imperat., infin., and 

w. conditional or final particles. 
That or lest, after verbs of fearing, 

To jest, Tmtfc. To speak in 
jest, Xeyetf rraifav. 

Esse (= edere, to eat), iadico. 

Oportet, xpv- 

Ut, tva or oncos. 

Vivo, £da>, a>, generic, and spoken 
of all things that have life ; op- 
posed to airo6vr)o-K€iv ; fti6a>, <5, 
especially of human life. 

Amo, (piXeco, w. 

Amabilis, qbiX-qTos, r\, 6v. 

Timeo, (pofiovpai, dcftoiica or Sedia. 

Ut, after verbs of fearing, fifj ov. 
Eng., that not. 

Sustineo, cpepa. 

Labor, oris, novos, ov, 6. 



Oral Exercise. 



Arj\6<; eanv einOvfjLcov, He plainly desires, or, It is plain 
that he desires. 

Ar)\o<; f)v 67ri6vfJLCDv, He plainly desired, or, It was plain 
that he desired. 

$poW£e oVa)?, Take care that. 

r Opa yJ), Beware lest. 

$o(Soi>fxai /lit}, I fear that, Vereor ne. 

$o/3ou/zat /jlt) ov, I fear that not, Yereor nt. 

' Ottcds ovv eaecde a%ioi, (See) then that you be worthy. 
Opa fjt,7) iral^cov Xe'yr), Beware lest he speak in jest. 

' Opa /at) iral^wv eXeyev, Beware lest he was speaking in 
jest. 



LESSON III. 11 

"Opa /jL7j Tral&v \ejjei, Beware lest he shall speak in jest. 

Mr) <j7T€v8€ irXovreLv, Be not in haste to be rich. 

"Iva <rvvTefjLV(o, To be brief. 

"iva €k tovtcov apgco/juai, To begin with these things. 

'/2? av fidOr)^^ cucovgov, Hear, that you may learn. 

AeSoi/ca fir) eiriKadwfjLeda^ I am afraid we may forget. 

Mr) djpocKOTepov j) to a\r)0es elirelvy (I am afraid) it is 
too rude a thing to say the truth. 

"Ep^erat, Iva tovto oBr), He is coming that he may see 
this. 

'HxOev Iva tovto Ihoi, or ' HXdev Iva tovto iSy, He came 
that he might see this. 

Mr) cpofiov, fir/ rjBrj it pea (3vi epos $?, rj wcTe Tr)v y\cdT- 
Tav K EXkr}viKr)v fiaOecv^ Do not fear that you are already 
too old to learn Greek. 

To be Written. 

1. It seemed to him expedient to nourish many and 
large dogs, that they might keep off for him the wolves 
from the sheep. 2. Menon the Thessalian plainly desires 
to be a friend to those who have the most power, that, 
having done wrong, he may not suffer punishment. 3. 
Take care that you burn the boats, in order that the enemy 
may not cross over the river. 4. (See to it) that your 
army have provisions. 5. He fears that the dogs may not 
keep the wolves from the sheep. 6. It will be my care 
that they cut short their replies and make them briefer. 
7. He feared that some of the soldiers would ascertain 
these things. 8. Beware lest, having done wrong, you 
quickly suffer punishment. 9. Let those who are in haste 
to be rich beware lest they become quickly poor. 10. He 
was not in haste to be rich, fearing that he should become 
quickly poor. 11. He feared that the enemy would burn 
the boats, in order that the army might not cross over the 



12 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

river. 12. (See) that you deliberate slowly and that' you 
execute quickly your resolves. 13. They feared that the 
enemy were speaking in jest. 14. Esse oportet ut vivas, 
non vivere ut edas. 15. Ut ameris, aniabilis esto. 16. 
Tinieo ut sustineas labores. 



LESSON IY. 

THE MOODS. , 

Conditional Sentences. 
References. 

Good., §§ 219-222. Kuh, § 339, I, (a), (b). 

Had., 744 - 746. Curt., § § 534 - 541. 

Had. EL, 511 - 514. Cr., § 631, Forms a & b. 
Koch, § 114, 1, 4. 

Examples. 

1. Tavra irdvTa 7rpo0v/j,r)dr)Ti a>9 a-a^earara tj/jlcv 
aTT^yyeikai,, el fJLT] t/s col aa^okia Tvy%dvei over a. 

Consent to rehearse to us all these things, as distinctly as 
possible, unless you chance to have some engagement (un- 
less there chance to be to you some occupation). 

2. Evey/carco T£? to (jydpfjLcifcov, cl Te'r pnnai* el 
Be (irj, Tpi^rdro) 6 avOpcoiros. Let some one bring the 
poison, if it has been mixed (lit. rubbed) : but if not, let 
the man mix it. 

3. El [lev 6eov rjv, ovk fjv aLO"%pOKep$r]5 • el o° ala^po- 
KepSr]?, ovk tj v Oeov. If he was (descended) from a god, he 
was not avaricious ; but if he was avaricious, he was not 
(descended) from a god. 

4. El Be 7rr) tovto €<ttcll, Tjj o\tj <f>d\ayyL KCLKOV 
earcLL. And if this shall anywhere be (the case), it will 
be a damage to the whole phalanx. 



, 



LESSON IV. 16 

5. El iPpovTTjae, zeal tfarpafev. If it thundered, 
it also lightened. 

6. El efiov\eTo^ eSvvaTO av ravra e^airarav. If 

he wished, he would be able to deceive in these things. 
„_ _ , ' v « / j / * % / 

A. Eh 7T6pl KaiVQV TWOS TTpaj/JLaTQS TTpQVTLVeTO A.6- 

j€iv, eirio-yov av. If it were proposed to speak about 
any new affair, I should have waited. 

8. El fMrj vfjbels rjXOere, eiropevo fxed a av eirl fiaat- 
Xea. If you had not come, we should be marching against 
the king. 

9. El 7r\etou? o-vveXeyrjcrav, etcivhvv€v<rev av 
Bia<p0aprjvai iroXv tov crTpareu/jLaTOS. If greater numbers 
had been collected, much of the army would have been in 
danger of destruction. 



Vocabulary . 



Avaricious, al(rxpoK.ep8r]9> is. 

Propose, 7rpoTi6r)iii. 

Speak, Xiyco. 

About, concerning, nepi, w. gen. 

New (in kind), mivos, rj, 6v, new 
(but not in kind), veos. 

Affair, 7rpayp.a, aros, to. 

Wait, eni^a (eVi, ex *)- 

Greater numbers, more per- 
sons, irXcioves or nXeiovs. 

Collect, o-vXXiyco. 

Army, arparevp-a, aros, to. Not 
easily distinguished from arpa- 
Tia. Cf Xen. Anab., I. 4, 5, 



Against, eVrt, w. ace. 

Chance, happen, Tvyxavco. 

Engagement, occupation, busi- 
ness, aaxoXla, ay, f). 

Rehearse, dnayyiXXco (cltto, ay- 
•yeXXco). 

Bring, cpepco. 

Poison, (pdpfiaKov, ov, to. 

Mix (by rubbing or bruising), 

Tp l/3a). 

Lighten, da-rpa7rrco. 
Thunder, fipovraco, a>. 
Deceive, iijanaTaco, (5. 
Si, el (w. indie, or optat.). 



where both words are spoken of Facio, 7roie<a, <5. 

the same object. Magnus, in the sense much, iroXvs, 

To be in danger, Kivdvveva. 7roXXr), ttoXv. 

Destroy, SicKpQeipco (Sicz, <p0eipa>). Gratia, x«P t? > lT0S > V* g ratiam 

Come, epxopai, f elpi, aor. rfXOov. habeo, x < *P lv ^X 40 ' or ot '^ a " 

March, iropevopai, dep. pass. Non, ov. 



14 EXERCISES IN GEEEK SYNTAX. 

Possum, dvvapai. Foris, out of doors, abroad, e£oo. 

Vivo, (dot, £a> • (3idco, /3i<5. Cf. Scio, ire, yiyva><rKa>. 

Ln., 111. Vy. Consilium, aocppoavvt], 7jy, f). 

Nisi, ei /ir). Domi, olkol. 

Litteree, literary pursuits, ypdfi- Ibi esse, to be there, to be 

p.ara, usu. p,adqp.aTa, drcou, rd. present, 7rapei/u. 

Arma, ottXu, av, rd. Ipse, avros- 

Parvi, of little value, worth Ad, irpns, or irapd. 

little, oXiyou agios, la, iov. Venio, ire, tpxpfuu. 

Oral Exercise. 

El rovro Trpdrrei, koXws eyei, If he is doing this, it is 
well. 

El rovro irpdrret, fcaXws eget, If he is doing this, it will 
be well. 

El rovro 7r parrei, rjfidprrjKev, If he is doing this, he has 
erred. 

El rovro €7rpa£e, tcaXcos eyei — Kakm e£%ei> — /ca\co$ 
eayev — KaXm egei, If he did this, it is well — it was well 
(continued) — it was well (simple past) — it will be well. 

El rovro €7rparre, rcaXcos av elyev, If he were doing 
this (now), it would be well. 

El rovro eirpa^e, tcaXcos av ecryev, If he had done this, 
it would have been well. 

El (BovXerai, hvvarai, If he wishes, he is able. 

El {3ov\rjo~erai, Svvrjaerai, If he shall wish (or simply, 
if he wish), he will be able. 

El efiovkero, eBvvaro, If he wished, he was able (con- 
tinued). 

El efiovXrjOr), eSwriOr], If he wished, he was able. 

El ejBovkero, eBvvaro av, If he wished, he would be able. 

El eftovXrjdr), eBwrjOrj av, If he had wished, he would 
have been able. 

El efiovXero, eSwrjOrj av, If he wished, he would have 
been able. 

El e/3ov\rj6r), eSvvaro av, If he had wished, he would 
be able. 



LESSON IV. 15 

To be Written. 

1. If he is (descended) from a god, he is not avaricious : 
he will not be avaricious. 2. If he were (descended) 
from a god, he would not be avaricious. 3. If it had been 
proposed to speak about any new affair, I should have 
waited. If it were proposed to speak about any new 
affair, I should wait. 4. If he shall burn the boats, Cyrus 
will not cross over. If he burned the boats, Cyrus did 
not cross over. If he had burned the boats, Cyrus would 
not have crossed over. 5. If greater numbers are col- 
lected, much of the army will be in danger of being de- 
stroyed. 6. If greater numbers were collected, much of 
the army would be in danger of being destroyed. 7. If 
you do not come, we shall march against the king. If 
you had not come, we should have marched against the 
king. 8. If you chanced to have some engagement, you 
would not be rehearsing all these things to us. 9. The 
man would have brought the poison, if it had been mixed. 
The man will bring' the poison, if it has been mixed : 
if it shall be mixed. 10. If it lightens, it also thunders. 
If it shall lighten, it will also thunder. 11. If it light- 
ened, it would also thunder. If it had lightened, it would 
also have thundered. 12. If you wished, you would be 
able to deceive in these things. If you had wished, you 
would have been able to deceive in these things. 13. Si 
feceris, magnam habebo gratiam. 14. Parvi sunt foris 
arma, nisi est consilium domi. 15. Non possem vivere, 
nisi in literis viverem. 16. Si ibi te esse scissem, ad te 
ipse venissem. 



16 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

LESSON V. 

THE MOODS. 

Conditional Sentences (continued). 
References. 

Good., §§ 223-225. Kim., § 339, II. 

Had., 747, 748. Curt., §§ 545, 546. 

Had. EL, 515, 516. Cr., 631, Forms c & d. 
Koch, § 114, 2 a, 2 b, 3. 

Examples. 

1. Eav firj rj ol <j>i\ocro(f>oL fiaei X eve axriv jj ol ftcuri- 
\rj<i* <f>i\o<To$r\a'(D<rLV, ov/c earb kclkwv iravXa rauq 
iroXeaiv. Unless either the philosophers shall become 
kings, or the kings philosophers, there is no cessation of 
calamities for states. , 

2. Kav (real av) fiev evXaftov/jLevo? tovto fir) Xeyco ra 
7T67T pay /ieva efiavr^ ov% eyeiv aTroXvaaaOac ra KaT7)yop7j- 
fieva oogG) ovo e<p ot? a^cco TLfiaauac oeifcvvvac eav o 
e$> a koI 7re7rolr)fca icai ireiroXireviiai^ ft a$i,%ca 7 TroXXa- 
kls Xeyeiv dvay Kacr6r\<ro /juat irepX e/jbavrov. And if, 
avoiding this, I shall not mention the things done by my- 
self, I do not think I shall be able (lit, I shall not think I 
have the ability) to refute the accusations, nor to show on 
what (grounds) I lay claim to be honored ; but if I pro- 
ceed step by step to what I have accomplished as a citizen, 
I shall be compelled to speak often of myself. 

3. Xapiv eiao /juat, eav aKovqre. I shall be grate- 
ful, if you listen. 

4. El avayKalov eoi] aSttceiv rj aSifcelaOai, eXolfiTjv av 
fiaXXov abiicelaOai. If it should be necessary to do wrong 
or to suffer wrong, I should prefer to suffer wrong. 

5. flcnrep av ei Tt? tarpon dadevovcri fiev Tot? /cdfivov- 



LESSON V. 



17 



aw elaicov fir) Xeyot fir)he Setfcvvoi 81 (bv airo^ev^ovTai 
ttjv vocrov, erreihr) Be reXevrTjaece Tt? avrcov ical ra vofii'Cp- 
fiev avrco (pepocro, aicoXovOwv eiit to fivqfia Bte^toc "et 
to kcll to% eiroiiqaev avOpwiros ovtoo-1^ ov/c av aire- 
QavevT Just as if some physician, visiting the sick while 
they were suffering, should not say nor indicate by what 
means they might escape the disease ; but when some one 
of them should die and the customary funeral rites should 
be performed for him, following to the grave, should recount, 
" If this man here had done so and so, he would not have 
died." 

* (3a<Ti\r)s, older Attic for fSaatXels. 

t ireiroiriKa ical TreiroXiTevfiai, a form of pleonasm, not uncommon in the 
orators, by which a thought is dwelt upon and thus emphasized; not 
easily expressed in English. 

% to teal to, art. as demonst. pron. 

§ ovTotji - ovtos with demonst. iota. 



Vocabulary. 

Unless, iav pr), w. subjunc. or el The 
fir) w. indie, or optat. 

If, iav w. subjunc. or el w. indie, or 
optat. 

Either... or, r)...rj. 

Philosopher, (pikoaocpos, ov, 6. 

To be a philosopher, (piXoo-ocpea), 
<S ; aor. to become a philoso- 
pher. 

King, ftacriXevs, ecos, 6. 

To be a king, Pao-iXevoa ; aor. to 
become a king. 

Cessation, navXa, tjs, r). Fr. iravco. 

Calamity, kokov, ov, to 

State, 7roXis, ea>s, r). 

Things done, to. 7re7rpay/j.6va. 

To be able, to have ability, e^co. 

To refute, to do away with, 
air o\vo fiat. 



accusations, charges, 

things alleged, to. KaTrjyopr)- 

fxeva. 
Avoid, behave cautiously in 

respect to, evkafteopai, ovfiai. 
Proceed step by step, /3a§i£a>. 
Accomplish as a citizen, noXt- 

Tevofxai ; or with more fulness and 

emphasis, iroiw kcu 7roXtTevofxai. 
Am compelled, dvayKa£op.ai 

(dvdyKrj). 
Often, TToWaKis- 
Am grateful, \dpiv olda, or x^P lv 

e X (o. 
Listen to, aicovco w. gen. 
Show, indicate, point out, Sei- 

KVVfXL. 

Lay claim, think worthy, a£ioa>, 
a>, (agios). 



18 



EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 



Honor, Tipdco, co. 

Necessary, unavoidable, dvay- 
Kalos, a, ov. 

Do -wrong, d6Wa>, co, (adiKos; a 
prw. 81/07). 

Suffer -wrong, ddiKeopai, ovpat. 

Physician, iarpos, ov, 6. 

Visit, go to, e'lac-ipi u: clat. (els, 
etfu). 

Sick, the one -who is sick, 6 
ndpvcov. 

Escape from, escape, dnocpevyco 
(dno, (pevyco), W. ace. 

Disease, voaos, ou, r). 

This man here, ovtoctL 

So and so, to kcu to. 

Die, TeXevrdco, co ; QvrjcrKco, dnoda- 
vovpai, divkQavov, TeBvqua. 

Engagement. See Ln., IV. Ex. 1. 

Distinctly, cracpcos ; most dis- 
tinctly, as distinctly as pos- 
sible, cos acKpeo-TaTa. 

Vicinus, 6 Trkqcriov (adv. w. art., 
used as subst). 



Equus, Irnros, ov, 6. 

Melior...quam, dpeivcov . . .rj. 

Habeo, e^o. 

Ne (enclit.) . . .an, irorepov. . .rj. 

Malo, /3ovAo/xcu. . .pdXkov. 

Dolor, \virq, rjs, r). 

Frango, w. dolorem, to suppress; 

navco, w. ace. ; or the const, nav- 

ea6ai w. gen. 

OCCVlltO, d7T0KpV7TTC0 (d7TO,KpV7rTCo). 

Virtus, dpeTr), r)s. r). 
Necessario, nar dvdytcrjv, dvdy<n, 

dvayKaicos. 
Gloria, 86^a, rjs, r): evdo^ia, as, r). 
Etiamsi, icai el 
Ago, to work for, to aim at, 

opeyopai, w. gen. 
Consequor, dico\ov6eco, co, w. dat. 
Senectus, yrjpas, aros. cos, to. 
Plenus, 7r\r)prjs, es. 
Voluptas, r)8ovr), rjs, r). 
Scio, to know how, iTtlarapai. 
Utor, xpdopuu, copai; infin. \pr)- 

o-Qai. 



Oral Exercise. 

'Eav tovto irpaTTT]) (ca\a)<; ei-ei, If be shall do this, it 
will be well. Lat. Si hoc faciet (or fecerit, or sometimes 
faciat), bene erit. 

El tovto irpaTToij fcaXoos eyoi^ If he should do this, it 
would be well. Lat. Si hoc faciat, bene sit. 

El tovto €7rpaTT€, tca\a>$ € ^X ev > -^ lie ^^ this, it was 
Well (continued). 

El tovto €7rpa%€ y «a\a»? eayev^ If he did this, it was 
well (simple past). 

El tovto €7rpaTT€, tcakm c\v e*%ez>, If he did this (con- 
tinued), it would be well. 

El tovto eirpa^e, fca\a)$ av ecryjEv, If he had done this, 
it would have been well. 



LESSON V. 19 

El touto irpdgei, fcaXcos egei, If he shall do this, it will 
be well (more vivid than eav w. subjunc.). 

'Eav fir) Xeyco ra ireirpayixiva efjuavTO), If I do not men- 
tion the things done by myself. 

El fir) Xe'fw, If I do not (if I shall not) mention ; more 
vivid than the foregoing. 

El fir) Xeyoc/M or Xegaifii,, If I should not mention. 

El /jlt) eXeyov, If I did not mention. 

El fir) eXega, If I had not mentioned. 



\ 



To be Written. 

1. Unless either the philosophers should become kings, 
or the kings philosophers, there would be no cessation of 
calamities for states. 2. Unless the philosophers had be- 
come kings, there would have been no cessation of calami- 
ties for states. 3. And if, avoiding this, he had not 
spoken of the things done by himself, he would not have 
been able to refute the accusations. 4. If he had pro- 
ceeded-step-by-step to what he accomplished-as-a-citizen, 
he would have been compelled to speak often of himself. 
5. If he should proceed-step-by-step to what he accom- 
plished as a citizen, he would be compelled to speak often 
of himself. 6. I should be grateful to you, if you would 
listen to me, while-I-show (particip.) on what (grounds) I 
lay claim to be honored. 7. I should have been grateful 
to you, if you had listened to me, in order that I might 
show on what (grounds) I laid claim to be honored. 8. If 
it is necessary to do wrong or to suffer wrong, I shall prefer 
to suffer wrong. 9. If this man here does so and so, said 
(e$rj) a certain physician, he will not die. 10. If greater 
numbers should be collected, much of the army would be 
in danger of destruction. 11. If he chances to have no 
engagement, he will rehearse all these things to us as 
distinctly as possible. 12. If he should chance to have 
no engagement, he would rehearse all these things to us 



20 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

most distinctly. 13. Si vicimis tuus equum meliorem 
habeat quam tuus est, tuumne equum malis an illius ? (If 
your neighbor were to have, etc., would you prefer, etc. ?) 
14. Dolorem si non potero frangere, occultabo. 15. Vir- 
tutem necessario gloria, etiamsi tu id non agas, consequitur. 
16. Senectus plena est voluptatis, si ilia scias uti (if you 
know how to use.it). 



LESSON VI. 
THE MOODS. 

Conditional Sentences (continued). 

References. 

Good., §§ 225 - 227. Kuh., § 339, 3 & R. 3. 

Had., 749 - 752. Curt., § § 547 - 549. 

Had. EL, 517 - 520. Cr., §§ 632 ff. 
Koch, § 114, 3, R. 2. 

Examples. 

1. irdvr €Kelvo<; 7]v avrol<; ' ovBe (f)a)vr)v tjkovov, ec rt? 
aXXo ti povXoiro Xeyeiv. He was everything to them: 
they did not even listen to a word (lit. a voice), if any one 
wished to say anything else (as perhaps some one might 
wish). 

2. Eav ovv €0 e\r)Gr)T€ (rrpareveaOal re teat Trpdrreiv 
allays v/jLcov avToov, lit cos av , t<ro)? ? w dv$pe$ 'Adrjvaloi, re- 
Xeiov ri kcli fieja KTr\aaia6 e dyaOov. If, therefore, you 
will consent both to take the field and to act worthily of 
yourselves, perhaps then, perhaps, men of Athens, you 
might obtain some complete and great advantage. 

3. Aid ye u/xa? clvtovs irdkai av dircoXcoXetTe. 
If you had been left to yourselves at least (or so far as de- 
pended on yourselves), you would have perished long ago. 

4. Ovre $LkL7nrov %evov out 'AXegdvSpov <f>cXov et- 



LESSON VI. 21 

iroiyJ av eyda cre, # ov^ ovrco fiawo/icu, €L fir) kcll tovs 
depLaras kol tovs aWo tl fiLaOov 7rpd.TTOVTa<; (f>L\ov$ kcll 
feVof? Bel Kakelv rcov fiLcrOcoo-a/jLevcov. I should neither say 
you were a guest of Philip nor a friend of Alexander, not 
I ; I am not so mad, unless it is proper to call both the 
reapers, and those doing anything else for hire, friends and 
guests of those who hire (them). 

5. 'AWa vvv ejcoye rov /jLaXcara eTTLTifiwvra rot? 7T€- 
irpayfievoLS r)Bea)<; av epo Lfirjv, tt}? 7ro/a? fiepi&os yeveaOaL 
rr)v ttoXlv eftovXeT* av. But now I, for my part, should 
like to ask the one who especially censures what has been 
done, to what party he would wish the city to belong. 

6. OvK YJV 7T£>0? TOV KvpOV TpOTTOV 6%0VTa /JLT) aTToBL- 

Bovai. It was not in keeping with the character of Cyrus, 
if he had (the pay), to fail to give (it) in full. 

7. N LK(DVT€S TLVa CLV CLTT KT € LV a L /JL6V >'; If We should 

be victorious, whom should we slay ? 

Ex. 1. Condition, el w. optat.; conclus. imperf. indie. 

2. Cond., edi> w. subjunc; conclus. optat. w. &v. 

3. Cond., preposit. w. ace; conclus. indie, past tense w. &v. 

4. Cond., d w. indie, pres. ; conclus. optat. w. &v. 

5. Cond., omitted; conclus. optat. w. &v ; & impf. indie, w. &». 

6. Cond., particip. ; conclus. indie, past tense. 

7. Cond., particip.; conclus. optat. w. (Lv. 

* Notice the juxtaposition of iyw <re, thus bringing them into more 
striking contrast ; also their emphatic position, — the force of which I have 
endeavored to present in my rendering. 

Vocabulary* 

Word, voice, $001/77, 77s-, 77. Advantage, ayadov, ov, to. 

Anything else, a\\o n. I perish, aivokoiKa > I perished, 

Consent, be willing, e'&fXco. "was perishing, aVcoXa>Aeti/; 2d 

Act, 7rparrto. pf. and plupf. of anoXXvfjLi, to 

Worthily, dgiws. destroy. 

Obtain, acquire, KTao/jiai, /erco/xcu. Call, name, KaXeco, co. 

Complete, reXeios, a. ov. Say, declare, (fivfxi, f. epa, aor. 

Great, fieyas. fieyakr] fieya. elnov. 



EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 



Guest, £evos. ov, 6. 

Philip, 4>iXi7T7ros, ov, 6. 

It is proper, necessary, Sel. 

Do, perform, 7rparrco. 

Hire, pay, "wages, pia$6s, ov, 6; 

for hire, pio~6ov. 
Hire, take into one's pay, pi- 

adoopai, ovpai. 
Take the field, engage in a 

military expedition, o~rpa- 

revopai. 
Pay in full, pay what is due, 

Ask, inquire, epcoraco, aor. comm. 
ljp6pr)V. 

Like to, expressed by ^Secoy, 
gladly, and the optat. w. av. 

"What, what sort of, iroios, a, ov. 

Party, pepis, L$os, rj. 

Belong to, become (a mem- 
ber) of, ylyvopac, w. gen. 

I for my part, eycoye. 

Especially, pdXio-ra. 

Censure, eniTipdco, c5. 

What has been done, ra ne- 
npaypeva. 

To be in keeping with, etvai 
npos w. gen. 

Character, rporros, ov, 6. 

The Athenians, ol ' Adrjvaiot.. 

To fail, often expressed by the nega- 
tive ; w. the infin. pf). 

To be victorious, vikckd. 

Slay, kill, diTOKTeiva>. 



Praise, eiraiveoa, <5. 

Hate, picreoo, co- 
Quid ? why ? tL; or Sta re; 

Timeo, <po(3ovpai, Se'Soi/ca. 

Beatus, evdaipav, ov; beatus 
futurus sum, evdaipeov elvai 
(or eo-€o~6ai) peXkco. 

Nemo, oideis, ovdepia, ovdev. 

Unquam, nore (enclit.}, TramoTe. 

Sine, avev w. gen. Tlie clause 
sine, etc., may peril, be best ren- 
dered by prj exoov iv. ace. 

Spes, iknls, l8os, rj: magna 
spes, perh. f] dyadrj iXnis- Dem. 

Immortalitas, ddavaaia, as, f). 

Pro, for, in behalf of, virep w. 
gen. • 

Patria, narpLs, idos, rj. 

Offer o, 7rpo^aX\opai; se offerre, 
eavrov TTpofidWeadaL, W. dat. of 
that to which one exposes 
himself. 

Mors, Odvaros, ov, 6. 

Forsitan, Icras. 

Miror, 6avpd£a>. 

Do, dare, diScopi. 

Animus, Bvpos, ov, 6. 

Par, "aos, rj, ov. 

Corpus, aatpa, aros, to. 

Facio, 7TGiea>, so. 

Qui, quse, quod, w. anteced. omit- 
ted, oorri?. r]TLS, o ti. 

Opto, are, €7ri6vpeco, a>. 



Oral Exercise. 
1. El TOVTO TTpCLTTeij KClXwS €%€l fCClkax; €<f« ? Si HOC 

facit, bene est — bene exit, If he does (or is doing) this, it 
is well — it will be well. 



LESSON VI. 23 

2. El tovto irpd^ei, iraXcos egei, Si hoc faciet, bene erit ? 
If he does (or shall do) this, it will be well 

3. El tovto eTrpaTTe, AcaXw? el^ev, ^i noc f ac i- e bat, bene 
erat, If he did this, it was well (continued). 

4. El tovto eirpa^e, rcaXcos eo-yev. Si hoc fecit, bene fuit, 
If he did this, it was well (simple past). The Latin may 
also be rendered, if he has done, etc. 

5. El tovto eTrpciTTe, fca\co$ av elyev, Si hoc faceret, 
bene esset, If he were doing this, it would be well. 

6. El tovto eTrpage, koXcds av eoryev, Si hoc fecisset, 
bene fuisset, If he had done this, it would have been well. 

7. 'Eav tovto irpaTTf) (continued or repeated), or edv 
tovto irpd^T) (simple fact, or completed action), koXws eljei, 
Si hoc fecerit, bene erit (or fuerit), If he do (or shall do — 
a probable event) this, it will be well. 

8. El tovto irpcLTTOi (continued), el tovto Trpdgece 
(simple fact), fcakax; av eypi (continued), fca\a)$ av o-^olr) 
(simple fact), Si hoc faciat, bene sit, If he should (hereafter) 
do this, it would be well. 

Note. The above are the principal forms of conditional sentences in 
Greek and Latin. 

To be Written. 

1. They would not listen to a word, if any one should 
wish to say anything else. (At some future time : el w. 
optat, av w. optat.) They did not listen to a word, if any 
one wished to say anything else. (As some one might wish. 
Ex. 1.) They would not listen to a word, if any one wished 
to say anything else. (At the present time : but no one 
does wish it). 2. If they will consent to act worthily of 
themselves, they will obtain some complete and great ad- 
vantage. 3. If he will consent to act worthily of himself, 
perhaps he might obtain some complete and great advan- 
tage. 4. If he had been left to himself at least, he would 
have perished long ago. 5. If they had been left to them- 



24 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

selves at least, they would have perished long ago. 6. 
They would not say we were the guests of Philip, unless 
it is proper to call those who do anything for hire the 
guests of those who hire them. 7. They would not con- 
sent to take the field, unless Cyrus pays them in full. 8. 
I should like to ask you to what party you wish to belong. 
9. I for my part should like to ask those who especially 
censure what has been done, to what party they would 
wish us to belong. 10. It is not in keeping with the 
character of the Athenians, if they have (the pay) to fail 
to give (it) in full. 11. If the Athenians should be vic- 
torious, whom would they slay? 12. Quid timeam, si 
beatus futurus sum ? (Why should I fear, if, etc.) 13. 
Nemo unquam, sine magna spe immortalitatis, se pro patria 
offerret ad mortem (in Greek, imperf. indie, w. av). 14. 
Forsitan haec illi mirentur (Perhaps they would, etc. optat. 
w. av). 15. Dedisses huic animo par corpus, fecisset 
quod optabat (Had you given = if you had given to this 
man a body equal to, etc. el w. aor. indie, and av w. aor. 
indie). 



LESSON VII. 

THE MOODS. 
Conditional Sentences in Indirect Discourse* 

References. 

See especially Part I., Lesson XX. 

Good., §§241, 242, 247. Kuh., § 345. 

Had., 733 - 738. Curt., § § 525 - 529. 

Had. EL, 501 - 504. Cr., § 617. 
Koch, §§ 108, 109. 



LESSON VII. 25 

Examples. 

1. EXe^ev ore, et deov f)v, ovk rjv atcr^potfepS?]?, 
"Ecj)!}, el 6eov r\v ? ovk elvai ala^poKepBea. 

He said that, if lie (some third person) was (descended) 
from a god, he was not avaricious. 

2. "EXegev oti, et ttk) tovto eaono, ttj bXrj (f>aXayyi ica- 

kov ecrouTo (hereafter), 

E(f)7] 7 €L 7T7] TOVTO 6CTOCTO, TJ) oX?) (fxiXajyi KCLKOV 6G6- 

crdat,. He said that, if this should anywhere be (the 
case), it would be a damage to the whole phalanx. 

3. EXe^ev 0Tt, el irepl kclivov tivos TrpayfiaTos it povTi- 

OeTO Xeyeiv, eireay^ev av, 

Ecfrrj, et 7r povT 16 €to Xe'yetv, eir ta^elv av. He 

said that, if it were proposed to speak about any 
new affair, he would have waited. 

Note. For the above sentences in oratio recta, see Lesson IV., Exam- 
ples 3, 4, and 7. 

4. EXe^ev oti, ei fir) oi cf>tXoao(f>ot j3aa iXevaeiav, ovk. 

ei7) fcatccov iravXa Tat? iroXeatv, 

E(f>rj, et fir) j3ao- iXevcr euav, ovk elvai kclkwv 

ktL He said, unless, etc., there would not be, etc. 

5. EXe^ev otl X ( ^P iv eto-otTo, et aKovoLTe, 

E(p7j yapiv elaeadai, et aKovoiTe . He said that he 
should be grateful if, etc. 

6. EXetjev otl, et avayKalov elrj aBtKelv rj aBiKeio~6ai, eXot- 

to av /uaXXov dBiKelaOai, 
E<f>7), et avayKalov eir] aBtKelv rj aBiKelcrQai, eXeaOat av 

fiaXXov dBiKeladat. , 
He said that, if it should be unavoidable, etc., he would 

choose, etc. 

Note. For Examples 4, 5, and 6, in oratio recta, see Lesson V., Exam- 
ples 1, 3, 4. 

Vocabulary. 
Say, Xeyco usu. iu. on or as & a finite (and a few forms of aor. 1, etna), 
mood ; <f>r}[Mi, u\ the infin. ; elirov in the sense to say, w. on or as. 
2 



26 



EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 



Unavoidable, necessary, dvay- 
Kaios, a, ov. 

Note. As the English words in 
this exercise have occurred before, 
they are not here repeated. 

Desum, to be wanting, to fail, 

eXXetVo) (ei>, XeiVoo). 
Polliceor, v7naxveop,ai, ovpai; 

usu. w. infi?i. fut. 
Audacter, Oappakeas (6dpo~os, 

new Att. ddppos). 
Dico, Xeyo). 
Volo, edeXco. 
Voluptas, rjdovt), rjs, 17. 



Ipse, avros, 77, 6. 

Pro, for the sake of, or instead 

of, ami u\ gen. 
Loquor, XaXeco, co, \eyco. 
Concedo, ey^copeco, a> (eV, ^copeco). 
Arbitror, qyeopai, ovpai. 
Dignitas, worth, virtue, d£icopa, 

aros, to. 
Vereor ne, bedoiica pq. 
Dum velim, while I wish, £3e- 

Xcov. 
Minuo, uere, p,et6oo, c5. 
Labor, novos, ov, 6. 
Augeo, ere, av£dva>, avf-r}cr<o, 

r)v£-r]o~a. 



Oral Exercise. 



1. E\efjav 6ta, ei rovro rrpaTTQi, fcaXcos av e%ot, 
Etyaaav, eu tovto irpaTTOi, tcaXcos av eyeiv, 
Dixerunt, si hoc faceret, bene futurum esse, 

They said that, if he should do this, it would be well. 

2. EXefjav on } ei tovto wpajjoL, fcaXcos efot, 
' Ecpao-av, el tovto irpa^oi, /caA-cos h^eiv, 

Dixerunt, etc., same as foregoing, 

They said that, if he should do this, it would be well 
(at some future time). 

3. EXe^av ota, ei tovto eirpaTTe, koXws av el^ev, 
Ecpacrav otl, ei tovto eirpaTTe, KaXws av e%eiv, 
Dixerunt, etc., same as Nos. 1 and 2. 

They said that, if he did this, it would be well. 

4. EXe^av otl, ei tovto eirpa^e, KaXws av eo"%ev, 
Ecpaaav, a tovto eirpa^e, KaXco<; av cr^elv, 
Dixerunt, si hoc fecisset, bene futurum fuisse, 

They said that, if he had. done this, it would hare been 
well (supposition with contrary reality, past time). 

Note. No examples of indirect sentences after the principal h 
here given, as the moods are unchanged. Often also after the historic 
tenses the indirect sentence retains the original mood. — E. G. 



LESSON VII. 27 

5. 'Hiropovv r/ 7tot6 Xe'yet (st. Xeyoc^ I was at a loss what 

in the world he meant (lit. what he means). 

6. *E\eyov otl Kvpos reOvrj/cev, They said that Cyrus was 

dead (lit. is dead). 

To be Written. 

1. If he is (descended) from a god,* he will not be 
avaricious. They say that, if he is (descended) from a god, 
he will not be avaricious. 2. He said * that if they were 
(descended) from a god, they would riot be avaricious. 3. 
He says that, if,* avoiding this, he shall not mention the 
things done by himself, he will not seem to have (or he 
will not think he has) the ability to refute the accusa- 
tions.-)- 4. He said that, if, avoiding this, he should not 
mention (hereafter) the things done by himself, he would 
not seem (at some future time) J to have the ability to 
refute the accusations. 5. He said that, if, avoiding this, 
he should not mention the things done by himself, he 
would not seem to have the ability to refute the accusa- 
tions. 6. They said * that, if it were proposed to speak 
concerning any new affair, they would wait — they would 
have waited. 7. They say that, if* it is proposed to 
speak concerning any new affair, they will wait. 8. They 
said, unless the philosophers shall become kings, or the 
kings philosophers, there will be no cessation of calamities 
for states. 9. They said that, if the philosophers should 
be kings, or the kings philosophers (at some future time), 
there would be £ a cessation from calamities for states. 

10. They say* they will be grateful, if* you will listen. 

11. They said they would be grateful (at some future 
time), if he would listen. 12. They said that, if it was 
unavoidable to do wrong or to suffer wrong, they would 
have chosen rather to suffer wrong. 13. He said that, if 
it should be unavoidable (at some future time) to do wrong 
or to suffer wrong, he would choose j rather to suffer 



28 



EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 



wrong. 14 Se non defuturum (esse) pollicetur, si audac- 
ter dlcere velint. 15. Yoluptatem si ipsa pro se loquatur 
concessuram arbitror Dignitati (I think that pleasure, if 
she herself, etc., would yield (the palm), etc.). 16. Vereor 



ne dum minuere velirn laborem augeam. 



Express in two ways. + Less. V., Ex. 2. t Optat. fat. without &v. 



LESSON VIII. 



MOODS IN RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 



References. 
Good., §§ 229- 233. Kim., §§ 333, 337. 

Had., 755 - 761. Curt., § § 551 - 558. 

Had. EL, 521 - 524. Cr., § 640 ff. 

Koch, §§ 117, 118. 

Examples. 

1. *A fir) ol&a, ovBe olo\xai eihevat,. What I do not 
know, I do not even think I know (= if I do not know, 
etc., = el w. indie, in protasis, and the indie, without av in 
apod.). 

2. 'Eirei^r) tolvvv eiro ir\<j aro rrjv eiprjvrjv r\ 7roA,t<? ? 
evravOa ttclXlv aice-tyaade rl tj/jlcdv ifcarepos tt poetXero 
rrrpcLTTeiv. When, therefore, the city had made the peace, 
then again consider what each of us chose to do (a tempo- 
ral sentence w. 'indie, in both parts). 

3. A el tou? ayadous avhpas ey^ecpelv fiev airacnv 
aei tols tcaXols, rrjv ayaOrjv 7rpo(3aXXofievov<; eXiriha^ <£e- 
peiv 8 o tl av 6 0eo? BtSa> yevvaiw?. It is necessary for 
good men always to put their hands to all honorable deeds, 
casting before them the good hope, and to bear nobly what- 
ever God gives (= edv w. subjunc. in cond., and the indie, 
in conclusion). 



LESSON VIII. 29 

4. k RvIk* av rt? u/za? aBitcy, ?5/Aet? V7rep vjjlwv fia- 
%ov/uLe0a. When any one shall wrong you, we will fight 
for you (temporal sentence = idv w. subjunc. in condit, 
indie, in conclus.). 

5. Ovk av e7re%€t,povfjL€V rrrparreLV a fjbrj rjTTKTrajjbeO a. 
We should not (then) be attempting to do what we did not 
understand (= el w. indie, in cond. and av w. indie, in con- 
clus.). Less frequent than the other forms. 

6. Ov% oa a €(3ov\ofJLe6a, aW baa Botrj to, Trpd<y- 
fidT eSet Be^eadat. It was necessary to accept, not all that 
we wanted, but all that the situation granted (first clause, 
a single definite fact ; second clause, hypothetical and gen- 
eral). 

7. f 'Ocrov<; alaOdvoLTO eiriopicovs teal dSi/covs, <y? ev 
wTrXiapbivov^ efyofteiro. As many as he perceived to be per- 
fidious and unjust, (these) he-used-to-fear as if they were 
well armed (i. e. if he ever became aware that any persons 
were perfidious, etc.). 

8. EireiSrj Se avoi^Oeir)^ eiayeifiev irapa tov ^oo/cparr}. 
And when (each morning) it (the prison) was opened, we 
went in to Socrates. 

9. Okvoitjv av et? ra ifkoia efi/3aLV6tv a rj/uuv Soltj. I 
should be loath to enter into the boats which he might give 
(==el w. optat. in cond., dv w. optat. in conclus.). 



Vocabulary* - 

Know, ol8a. peace for one's self, TroieioQai 

Think, o'lopai. elpqvrjv. 

When, in the sense after, eVftS^ ; Then, correl. of irreibf], ivravQa. 

w. subjunc. eneiMv ; at the time Again, irakiv. 

■when, ore ; w. subjunc. orav ; Consider, o-Koneoo, <£ ; also, a-Koneo- 
at the exact time when, pat, ovpai,f. o-Ke-ty-opai, aor. io-ite- 
T]vi<a ; w. subjunc. fjviica av. i^aprjv, eo-Keppai ; from Arist. on- 

Therefore, accordingly, rolvvv. ward, ovcotj-^cxg), Zo-Korrqcra kt4. 

Peace, dprjvr], rjs, r) ; to make Each, of two, €Karepos, a, ov ; of 



30 



EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 



any number more than two, e<a- 
cttos. 
Choose, choose beforehand, 
rrpoaipeofiai, ov/xai ; aor. irpoei- 

\6fMTJV. 

Do, TTpaTTG) ; to do, to make 
(some particular thing), 7roiea>, 
7roi<» ; to do, to act (general), 
tvpaxTto. 

Fight, pd)(op.ai. 

For, in behalf of, vnep w. gen. 

Bear, cpepco. 

Nobly, yevvaloos. 

Attempt, put the hand to, iy- 
Xeipev, &, (iv, ^«p). 

Understand, eVioTa/MH. 

Accept, receive, bexop-ai. 

"Want, wish, fiov\o}iai ; to want, 
be in need of, ask for, deop.ai. 

All (the things) that, ocra;fr.oaos, 
T), ov. 

The situation, the circum- 
stances, affairs, irpdy^ara, rd. 

Grant, give, oYSoo/u. 

Prison, 8eo~p,a>Tr)pLOV, ov, to. 

Open, dvoiyvvp-i ; also dvolyco ; later 
dvoiyvvco. 

Go in, e'lo~eifii, usu. asfut. 



To the presence of, napd w. ace. 

Socrates, ^coKpar-qs, ovs, 6 ; ace. 
SooKparr), or ^aKpdrrjv. 

To be loath, oKveto, <5. 

Enter, embark, e/x/3aiVco, const. 
els 10. ace. 

Non dubito, ot>K dnoKveco (and, 
oKveoa)^ 

Dare operam, Troieladai enrovhrjv. 

Ut videam, Greek injin. Idelv. 

Cum, w. pres. or fui., orav w. sub- 
junc. 

Satis commode, els koKov. • 

Possum, Svvap.cu, subjunc. dvvia- 
pu (note the accent). 

Qualis, olos, a, ov. 

Animus, yjsvxVi ijs, V- 

Nescio, ovk oida. 

Xerxes, Sep^rjs, ov, 6. 

Praemium, pucrdos, ov, 6, pay, re- 
ward ; adXov, ov, to, the prize of 
a contest (of any sort), reward. 

Propono, 7rpoTi6rip.i. 

Qui, whoever, oaris, f]Tis, 6 ri. 

Invenio, evpiaKco. 

Novus, Kaivos, r\, ov, new in kind, 
newly invented. 

Voluptas, fjSovr), rjs, f]. 



Oral Exercise. 



"Oaa fBovXerai, All that he wishes. 
"Ocra eftovXero, All that he wished. 
r/ Oaa av fiovXrjTctL, All that he may wish. 
"Oaa ftovhoiTO) All that he might wish (or simply, All 
that he wished). 

f/ n wpaTTet, "Whatever he does. 

"O to eirpaiTev, Whatever he was doing. 



LESSON VIII. 31 

r/ ti av TrpciTTT), Whatever he may do. 

"O tl 7r parrot, Whatever he might do (or whatever he 
did). 

"Ora evrvyx^vet, Whomsoever he falls in with. 

"Orcp evervwavev, Whomsoever he fell in with (repeated). 

"Oro) av evrvy^dvrj, Whomsoever he may fall in with. 

"Orw evrvyydvoi, Whomsoever he might fall in with (at 
any time) (or, Whomsoever he fell in with). 

'Eirei^r) epx^rat, When he is coming. 

'Eirei^r) yei, When he came, or was coming. 

'Eirei^r] r}\0ev, When he came (simple fact). 

^Eireuhdv ty, When he comes. 

'E7ret8?7 e\6oi s When he came, or as often a£ he came. 

To be Written. 

1. What he did not know,* he did not think he knew. 
2. When therefore the city made peace,-)* then again you 
used to consider what each of us chose -j- to do. 3. When 
therefore the city has made the peace, then again you 
wull consider what each of us may choose to do. 4. When 
any one wronged you,* we used to fight for you. 5. They 
bore nobly whatever God gave.* 6. They would bear 
nobly whatever God might give. 7. We should not (then) 
be thinking we knew what we did not know (cf. Examp. 
5). 8. I am not attempting to do what I do not under- 
stand. 9. They will accept, not all that they may want, 
but all that the situation may grant. 10. When the 
prison has been opened, we will go in to the presence of 
Socrates. When the prison was opened, \ they went in to 
the presence of Socrates. 11. They are loath to enter into 
the boats which he may give us. 12. When it is proposed 
to speak about any new affair, he waits. When it was 
proposed to speak about any new affair, he-used-to-wait. 
13. When it was proposed to speak about any new affair, 
he waited. They said that he waited, whenever it was 



32 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

proposed to speak about any new affair. 14. Non dubitabo 
dare operam ut te videam, cum id satis commode facere 
potero (I shall not hesitate to take pains to see you, when 
I can, etc.). 15. Qualis sit animus, animus nescit. 16. 
Xerxes prsemium proposuit qui invenisset novam volup- 
tatem. 

* Express this in two ways, — as a particular, definite fact, and as gen- 
eral, or hypothetical. 

t Express as general, or hypothetical. 
X Express as a particular instance. 



LESSON IX. 

MOODS IN RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES (continued). 
References. 

Good., §§ 236-240. Kuh., §§ 333, 337. 

Had., 710, c ; 771, 822. Curt., §§ 500, 551 -558. 

Had. EL, 522, 524. Cr., §§ 558, a ; 640 - 642. 

Koch, §§117, 118. 

Examples. 

1. Aeo/jbai iraKiVy coairep ef a'/?X*? ? 5 aXkov Tti/o? \6<yov, 
6'? /jl6 Trelaet g>? tov airoOavovTOS ov <jvvairoQvr\cncu rj 
tyvyj)- I again ask, just as at first, for some other argument 
which shall convince me that the soul of the one who is 
dead * does not die at the same time (or such as to con- 
vince, etc. The relative denoting fitness). 

2. TV? outgo? evr\6r)S eariv v/awv, bans ayvoel top 
etceWev ttoXc/jlov Sevp rfeovra, av afjbe\.r\crcdfiev ; Who of you 
is so simple as not to know that the war will come from 
thence hither, if we are remiss ? (or, that he does not know, 
etc. The relat. denoting result). 

3. <f>a<ri rrjv o'Cv irpos tov heairoTi^v €iire7v • 6avp,ao~TOP 
7roiet?, b? rjfjLLV p,ev ovBev ch'Sco?, rco Be tcvvl yueraS/So)? 
ovirep clvtos e^ei? gltov. They relate that the sheep said to 



LESSON IX. 33 

its owner, You do a strange (thing) in that you give nothing 
to us, but share with the dog in the very food which you 
yourself have (the relative denoting cause). 

4. ' EXeyov ore r\KOiev rjye/jiovas e%ovT€<;, o\ avrovs 
a^ovcrcv evdev ei;ovo~ i ra ernrriheia. They said that they 
were come with guides who should conduct them (to a 
place) from which they should have provisions (or to con- 
duct them, etc. The relative denoting purpose). 

5. TavTa errolovv, fie^pL a kotos eyeveTo. They con- 
tinued to do these things, until darkness came on. 

6. UepifjbiveTe, ear' av eX6co. Wait till I come. 

7. Mr) dvafieivQ)/jL€v e&>9 av"\ rrXeiovs 61 iroXe/xLOL tj/jlcov 
yevcovTdi, aXX ccofiev, ew? ere ocofieda evTrercos av 
auTcov fcparrjcrai. Let us not linger until our enemy become 
more numerous than we (are), but let. us go while we still 
think we may easily conquer them. 

8. Ilepietievofiev eKaGTOje, ew? avoi%6eir) to Beafico- 
Tjjpiov. We stayed around on each occasion, until the prison 
was opened (or should be opened). 

9. Ovk rjdeXe Kvpa) €t? ^elpas tevai, irpvvX r) yvvr) 
avrov erreicrev . He was unwilling to go into the hands of 
Cyrus, until his wife persuaded him (irplv w. the indie). 

10. Mr) a,7reXdr)T€, Tr p\vt clv aKOva-rjre. Do not go 
away until you hear (rrplv w. the subjuno). 

11. Ovk av elhelrjs irpiv % 7r€ipa6et,r)$. You would not 
know until you had tried (it), or until you should have, 
etc. {rrplv w. the optat.). 

* Lit. of the one who died. 

+ With ews, ivrz, A«fx/H, and the subjunc, &v is sometimes wanting, as 
in final sentences. Cf. Lesson III. 
X "rrplv, until, in the sense sooner than. 

Vocabulary. 
Ask for, hiojxai w. gen. Argument, \6yos, ov, 6. 

Just as, fownep. Convince, persuade, irci6(o. 

At first, e£ apxrjs. That, declarative conjunc. cos. 

2* c 



34 



EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 



Soul, tyvxhi l s i V' 
Die, d7rodvf)<TK(0 ; die "with, die 
at the same time, avvanoBvr]- 

CT/CCO. 

Foolish, simple, evfjBrjs, es. 
Not to know, to be ignorant 

of, dyvoeco, a>, const, ace. W. par- 
tic ip. 
From thence, imcWcv. 
Hither, devpo. 
To be remiss, dp-eXea, a>. 
Strange, 6avp.ao-Tos, rj, 6v, a 

strange (thing), 6avp,ao~Tov. 
Guide, rjyefxav, ovos, 6. 
With, particip. e^cov. 
Conduct, ayco. 
Provisions, emTrjdeia, av, rd. 
Wait, lit. stay around, 7repi/xei/a>; 

wait, linger, lit. stay on, dva- 

fxevcd. 
Till, until, ecos, tore, fie'^pi; izplv 

usu. after negative sentence. 
Share with, give a share of, 

/xeraSiSco/zt, w. dat. 8f gen. 
Food, (tTtosj ov, 6. 
Enemy (collective), oi noXep-iot. 
More numerous, 7rAeiW= n\eio- 

ves, comp. ofnoXvs. 
While, as long as, ecos chiefly 

w. pres. indie. 
Still, yet, en. 
Easily, evneTcos. 
Conquer, KpaTeco, <3, w. gen. 
Linger, dvapevco. 



Darkness, ctkotos, ov, 6. 

To come on, to become, ylyvo- 

p,ai. 
On each occasion, eKaoTore. 
To try, 7T€ipdop,ai, <op.ai ; dep.pass. 

or mid. 

MittO, 7rep7T(D. 

Qui, OS, 7), O ; OOT19, TJTIS, O TL. 

Consulo, consulere, dvaicoivoco, 

co, w. dat. 
Apollo, inis, 'AnoXktov, avos, 6. 
Senex, yipcov, ovtos, 6. 
Sero, serere, <pvTeva>, evaco. 
Arbor, & arbos, arboris, dhdpov, 

OV, TO. 

Alter, akXos, 77, o. 

Seculum, yeved, as, f). 

Frosum, prodesse, oxpeAeco, <3, 
usu. w. ace. 

Nemo, neminis, ovbeis, ovdep.la, 
ovdev. 

Tarn, ovra>, before a vowel ovtcos ; 
tarn senex, qui, ovtco yepcov (or 
7rpecr/3uT77?), octtls. 

Non, in a sentence denoting pur- 
pose or result, p,rj. 

Puto, are, o'louai. 

Annus, iviavTos, ov, 6. 

Nam, ydp. 

Innocentia, se, aKaKia, as, 77. 

Affectio, onis, ndOos, otj?, to', af- 
fectio t^lis, quae, ndOos toiov- 

TOV, 0I0V. 

Noceo, ere, /3Xa7rrco, w. ace. 



Oral Exercise. 

1. Ouk rjOeXe irplv rj/covaev, He was not willing, until he 
heard. 
Ouk av eOeXoc Trpiv aKovaeceu, He would not be willing, 
until he should hear. 



LESSON IX. 35 

My e0e\e irplv av d/covcry?, Do not consent, until you 
hear. 

2. f/ E<w? (e<7T6, tiexpi) rjKOev^ Until he came. 

f/ Eo)? (eo-T€, fiexP c ) €\0oi* Until he came (or might 

come). 
f/ Ea>? (eo-Te, fie'xpi) av e\0y, Until he come, or has come. 

3. A eo fiat aXXov Xoyov 6? fie Tre&W, I ask for another 

argument, which (such as) shall convince me. 

Ovro)<i evrjdris eaTtv, o<nt<s dyvoet, He is so foolish as 
not to know (or that he does not know). 

GavfiaaTov Trotet, o? rjfilv ov&ev Bt&<p, He does a strange 
(thing), in that he gives nothing to us. 

"H/covcrtv rjy€fjLova<; e^oi>Te?, o% rjfias agovcrtv, They are 
come with guides to conduct us (or, who will con- 
duct us). 

Note. Note carefully the various uses of the relative pronoun, denot- 
ing fitness, result, cause, purpose, and the various ways in which it may 
be rendered. 

4. f/ Eo>? ert olofieda, While we still think. 
"Ecos en wo/ieOa, While we still thought. 

* Often denotes indefinite frequency. 
To be Written. 

1. He again asked, just as at first, for some other argu- 
ment which should convince * him that the soul of the one 
who is dead does not die-at-the-same-time. 2. They were 
so foolish, as not to know that the war would come hither 
from thence, if they were remiss. 3. They do a strange 
(thing), in that they ask for some other argument, which 
shall convince them that the soul of the one who is dead 
does not die-at-the-same-time. 4. He is come with guides 
to conduct -f- them (to a place) from which they shall have 
provisions. 5. If you will wait till I come, I will share 
with you in the food which I myself have. 6. Having 
waited till I came, they shared with me in the food which 



36 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

they themselves had. 7. We will not linger until the 
enemy become more numerous, but will go while we still 
think we may easily conquer them. 8. They did not 
linger till the enemy became more numerous, but went 
while they still thought they might easily conquer them. 
9. If you had lingered until darkness came on, you would 
not easily have conquered the enemy. 10. It is necessary 
to wait on each occasion until the prison is opened. 11. 
We will wait, while the prison is opening (is being opened), 
if we may go in to the presence of Socrates. 12. They 
would not know until they had tried. They will not know 
until they have tried. They did not know until they tried. 
13. Missi sunt qui consulerent Apollinem. 14. Senex 
serit arbores, quce alteri seculo prosint. 15. Nemo est 
tarn senex, qui se annum non putet posse vivere. 16. 
Nam est innocentia affectio talis animi, quce noceat nemini 
(For innocence is such a quality of mind as to, etc.). 

* Fut. optat. Cf. Lesson VII. + Relative clause. 



LESSON X. 

MOODS IN THE EXPRESSION OF A WISH. 
References. 

Good., § 251. Kuh., § 259, 3, (b) ; & Rem. 6. 

Had., 721, 753, 834, 870, c. Curt., §§ 514, 515, 614. 

Had. EL, 489, 570. Cr., § 638. 
Koch, § 105, 6 & 8. 

Examples. 

1. Mr) SrJT , nrdvres #eot, /jltj 8 et? ravd' vfxwv eiTLvev- 
<T6t€v, aWa fiaXcara kcll tovtois fteXTico tlvcl vovv xal 
<f>peva<; evdecr/re. May* no one of you, all ye gods! 
sanction these things ; but above all, put even in these men 
some better mind and heart. 



LESSON X. 37 

2. To ovv, co KCLTapar, epuol irepl tovtcov XocSopel, kcll 
\ey€L<; a aol kcll toZ? crocs ol deoi r pe-fyecav et? Ke<f>a\r]v ; 
Why, then, accursed one, do you revile me for these 
things, and speak of those things which may the gods 
turn on your head, and on (the heads of) your (accom- 
plices) ! 

3. * fit yap etcetvovs awOrfvaL /cat Karopdcoaai fiaXtara 
htefapev^ ovtos kcll iraOovToav a p,r]iTOT axfieXov f ttjs 
virep (ittcivtcov Xutttjs TrXelajov pLerel-^ev. For (the man) 
whom it especially concerned that they should come off in 
safety, and with success, this man, when they had even suf- 
fered what I could wish they had never (suffered), shared 
most largely in the grief for all. 

4. Mrj /not, yevotQ* a /3ov\o/ju , oU a crv/ji(j)€p€t. May* 
not those things which I wish, but those which are profita- 
ble, fall to my lot. 

5. El6 , ci) Xajcrre, crv toiovtos cov obiXos tj/ilv ye'voLo. 
Would that you, most excellent man, being such a per- 
son, might become a friend to us ! 

6. EiOe croc rore o~vveyev6p,r}v. that I had then met 
with you ! 

7. AXX co<f)6\€ Kvpos £rjv. Would that Cyrus were 
alive ! 

8. Oip,oi,Ti Bpacrco ; yJytroT wabeXov Xlttclv rrjv %kv- 
pov. Woe is me ! what shall I do ? that I had never 
left Scyrus ! 

9. El yap roaavrr/v lxjvap.iv el^ov. that I had so 
much power ! 

10. '12 iral, ye'voco irarpos eurin^e'o-Tepo?. child, may* 
you become more fortunate than your father ! 

* Observe that the optative in wishes is often rendered by the English 
may, etc. 

+ Sc. iradeiv, suggested by iradovruv. The infin. would need to be ex- 
pressed with &<pe\ov, taken out of this connection. 



EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 



Vocabulary. 



Sanction, emveva) (eVi, vevio), to 

nod assent to. 
To put or place in, ivriOnpi. 
Mind & heart ; vovs /eat (ppeves 

are not easily distinguished in 

meaning: out may perhaps be 

thus rendered. 
Turn, rpeTTco. 
Head, icecpaXr), rjs. fj* 
Suffer, 7racr^co. 
Share in, participate in, perex<o 

(perd, e^co) w. gen. 
Grief, \virr], n$, f). 
To profit, to be profitable, o-vp- 

(pepco. 
To fall to one's lot, y[yvop.ai w. 

dat. 
Such, -toiovtos, rj, o, or ov. 



Meet with, vvyyiyvopai ic. dat. 
Then, at that time, totc. 
Live, be alive, (da, £g>. 
Fortunate, euri^r,?, es', comp. 

-earepos, sup. -eararos. 
Possess, €^05. 

So much, rocroCros', n, o, or ov. 
Leave, Xenrco. 

Scyrus, or Skyrus, 2/cupos, ov, rf. 
Utinam, eWe, or el yap. 
Possum, hvvapai. 
Conatum, nelpa, as, tj. 
Efficio, e7riTeXe'ou, co. 
Falsus, yjfev&rjs, h- 
Vates, pavTLSi ecos, 6. 
Ne vere, prj aknBws. 
Scribo, ypdcpa. 



Oral Exercise. 



1. nda^ot dv, He miglit (or would) be suffering. 
ndo-^oc, May he be suffering ! 

v Eiracryjcv av, He might (or would) be suffering (but is 

not). 
EWe (or el yap) 'eiraa^ev, that (or would that) he 

might be suffering (a wish that cannot be fulfilled). 

2. HdQoi dv, He might (or would) suffer. 
IldOoi, May he suffer ! 

"EiraOev dv, He might (or would) have suffered (but did 

not). 
ElOe eiradev, that (or would that) he had suffered (a 

wish contrary to the reality). 

3. Ovk dv irdOoi, He might (or would) not suffer. 
Mr) TrdOoL, May he not suffer. 

Ovk dv eiraOev, He might (or would) not have suffered 
(if something had happened which did not happen). 



LESSON X. 39 

ElOe (or el yap) fir) eiraQev, that he had not suffered! 
or would that, etc (but he did suffer). 

4. "{IfaXe rraayeiv, that he were suffering ! 
v n$e\e iraOelv, that he had suffered ! 

Mr) a>(f>e\e rracryeiv, that he were not suffering ! 
Mr) wcf>6\€ iradelvy that he had not suffered ! (Wishes 
implying contrary reality.) 

5. Mr) tb(f>ekov ravra eiriveveiv, that they were not sanc- 

tioning these things ! 
Mr\ (ocfreXov ravra eirivevaai^ that they had not sanc- 
tioned these things. 

To be "Written. 

1. all ye gods ! would that * no one of you had sanc- 
tioned these things ; would that you had put even in these 
(men) some better mind and heart ! 2. Would that the 
gods had turned these things on your head and (on the 
heads of) your (accomplices) ! 3. that they had never 
suffered these things ! that they were not suffering -f- 
these things ! 4. that Cyrus had never suffered these 
things ! that Cyrus were not suffering these things ! 
5. May they not suffer these things, nor share in the grief 
for all ! 6. that those things which were profitable, 
and not those things which I wished, had fallen to my lot ! 
7. that you, being such (a person), had become a friend 
to me ! that you, being such (a person), were a friend 
to me ! 8. Would that they might then meet with us ! 
Would that they had then met with us ! 9. Would that 
they had not suffered these things, and were alive ! 10. 
May the child never suffer these things, and may he become 
more fortunate than (his) father. 11. Would that he had 
never possessed so much power! 12. He would never { 
have possessed so much power, if he had not § left Scyrus. 
13. He would never possess so much power. May he 
never possess so much power. 14. Utinam possem. Uti- 



40 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

nam potaissem. 15. Utinam conata emcere possem. 16. 
Falsus utinam vates siin. 17. Illud utinam ne vere scri- 
berem. 

* " Would that" and "0 that" are rendered into Greek by etde, el yap, 
or &<pe\ov ; or sometimes by etde, or el yap prefixed to &<pe\ov. 
+ Pres. infin. ira<rx eLV - 

X Apodosis of a conditional proposition, neg. ov. 
§ Protasis, neg. firj. 



LESSON XI. 

MOODS IN EXHORTATIONS AND PROHIBITIONS. 
References. 

Good., §§ 252-254. Kim., § 259, 1, 4, 5. 

Had., 720, 723, 833. Curt., §§ 509, 510, 518. 

Had. EL, §§ 487, 488, 492, 570. Cr., § 628. 
Koch, § 105, 2, 4. 

Examples. 

1. El S' ap e%ovo~Lv aviarm?, tovtovs fiev avrovs /ca8 
eavTovs el; co\ei<; xal irpowikeLS • ev jrj kcll dakarTp ttoit]- 
o-are, rj/jblv 8e Tot? \ot7rot? tt]v to^lgttjv airaWayqv rwv 

67T7]pTr)/jLevCOV (f)o{3(OV 8 O T € KCLl (T0)T7]piaV CMTcfxikf]. But if, 

as is likely, they are incorrigible, render these, alone by 
themselves, utterly ruined on land and sea; but to us 
who remain, grant the speediest release from the impending 
fears and a safe deliverance. 

2. Tore roivvv ra fiev efieWev, eo? eBofcei, rwv Setvcov, 
ra $ r)8r) irapfjv, ev oh ttjv irpoaipeaiv fiov aKoirei rrjs 
7ro\tTeta<j, fjur) ra avp,(3avra o~vtco<pavreL. At that time, 
therefore, some of the perils were impending, as it seemed ; 
but others were already present, in which look attentively 
at my plan of administration, be not perpetually complain- 
ing of what has happened. 



LESSON XI. 41 

3. Mr) Br) rovro &>? aSUrjfia efiov 0f)$, ev Kparrjcrac 
(Tvvefir) QcXLTTTra) rrj ^d^rj. Do not se ^ ^his down as a 
crime of mine, if it happened to Philip to conquer in 
battle. 

4. Kal fJLOV fjurjBels rr)v i)7r€pj3o\r)v Oavfiaar), aWa 
/jl€t evvolas o \eyco 6e<o prjcrdrco. Let no one wonder at 
my extravagant assertion, but let him observe with can- 
dor what I say. 

5. Geda aaOe rolvvv a><? aaOpou, q>? eot/cev, eari <f>v<76L 
irdv o n av fir) Bucalws fj ireirpaypievov. Behold, therefore, 
how rotten, as it seems, is everything by nature, which has 
not been done justly. 

6. Nvv LO)fM6v tcai aKovacofiev rov avBpos, eirwra 
dicovcravTes real aXAot? dvafcotvcjo-Mfieda. Now let us 
go and listen to the man ; then, after hearing (him), let us 
confer with others also. 

7. Mr) (iTe\r) rov \6jov KaTaXeiircofiev. Let us not pro- 
ceed to abandon the argument (while it is) incomplete. 

8. $epe Br) kcll ras rwv Xetrovpytcov fiapTvpia<$, cov 
XeXeLTovpyrjtca, vjxiv dvayvw. Come, now, and let me read 
to you the testimonies of the public services which I have 
performed. 

Vocabulary* 

Render, make, noieat. Fear, <£o/3o?, ov, 6. 

To be incorrigible, ex^iv avid- Look-attentively-at, inspect, 

tcos-. <7ko7j-6co, <3, fut. aKe^op.ai, aor. 

Utterly ruined, e£ai\T)s kcu npooi- e<TKe\lsdp.r)v, etc. 

Xr/y. Plan, 7rpoaipeais, €a>s, f). 

On land and sea, lv yj) ml 6a- Administration, iro\iT€ia, ay, rj. 

\aTTT]. To be-perpetually-complain- 
Those "who are left, ol Xonroi. ing, avKocpaureco, a>. 

Speedy, ramus', e?a, v ; comp. 6dr- What has happened, r'a av/x- 

tcoV, svp. Tdxt-crTos. fidvra (av/JLJ3aLVco). 

Release, dnaXkayr), r}r, 17 (diraX- To set, put, set down, riQ-qpi. 

Xarro)).' Crime, unjust act, ddUrjfjia, aros, 
Impend, enaprdofiai. a>p,ai. to. 



42 



EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 



Wonder at, 6avpd£a>. 

Extravagant assertion, vnepfio- 
Xi), 7$, r). 

Observe, deoopea, 5>. 

Candor, evvoia, as, i) ; with candor, 
per evvoias. 

Behold, Oedopai. (o/xat. 

Rotten, aadpos. a, ov. 

How (as relat. adv.), cos. 

Nature, cpvais, €<os,fj ; by nature, 
(pucrei. 

Justly, bucaicos (SiKaios, a, ov). 

Do, perform, 7rparrco. 

It seems, eoiKe(v). 

Come, come now, (pep*, <p*P € drj- 
used as interjection, without re- 
gard to the number or person of 
the verb which follows. So also 
aye, Wi. 

Read, dvayiyvao-KO). 

Testimony, p.aprvpia, as, r). 

Public service, Xeirovpyia, as, i). 

Perform-a-public-service, Xei- 
Tovpyeco, <S. 



Man, Lat. vir, dvr)p, dvBpos, 6. 
Abandon, leave behind, Kara- 

XeiVa). 
Argument, \6yos, ov, 6. 
Incomplete, aTe\r)s, is (a priv. 

rikos). 
Percontator, oris, 6 TroXwrpay- 

p.oov, ovos. 
Fugio, ere, cpevya), w. ace. ofpers. 

or thing : also in other construc- 
tions. 
Nam, yap postp. 
Garrulus, 7ro\vXoyos, ov, (7roXvs, 

Xoyos). 
Idem, 6 avros, rj, 6. 
Impius, a, um, dae fir) s, es (a 

priv. o-e/3opcu). 
Ne, p.r). 

Audeo, ere, roXp.dco, St. 
Placo, are, p,aXdo-o-a>, -tt<o, w. ace. 

(u.aXaKOS, r), ov). 
Donum, 8a>pov, ov, to. 
Ira, 0/2777, r)s, i). 
Deus, 6eos, ov, 6. 



Oral Exercise. 



1. Mr) crvtcocpavrei, Be not in the habit of complaining. 
Mr) (Tvfco(j)avTr)o-r)<;, Do not complain (or find fault). 
MrjBeh o-vKocpavTelra), Let no one be in the habit of 

complaining. 
Mri&eh crvKo(j)avTriar}, Let no one complain. 

2. A/covco/iev, aKovaoofJuev. 
Mr) cikovg)/jl€v tov dvSpos. 
Mr) aKovawfiev tov dvhpos. 

3. Let ns be in the habit of acting justly. 
Let us act justly. 

Let us not be in the habit of acting unjustly (dSUcos). 
Let us not act unjustly. 



LESSON XI. 43 

4. Mrjhev ayav (sc. €<ttco), Let nothing be in excess. 
Tvwdt aavrov. ylyvcoa/ce aavrov. 

Tvwfjiev tj/jlcls avrovs, yiyvcoaKco/xev rjfxas avrovs. 
Ne quid nimis, Ne plus ultra (^77 irXelov efo>). 

5. M?) Oav/na^e, (xr) Oav/JLaarjs. 

Mr) davfid^cofiev, /jltj Oavfiaacofiev. 
$epe Srj, ra? fxaprvpta^ avayvco. 
<Pepe or), ra? fiapTvplas avaycofiev. 

6. M?) dreXr) rov Xoyov /caraXenreTe. 
Mr) dreXr) rov Xoyov /caraXnrrjre. 
*'AXXol$ dvafcocva)fjL€0a. 

AXXols avafcoiVGHTMfJieOa. 

7. Xkottzi, a/ceyfrat, aKOirelre^ atceyfraade. 
Mr) aKOTrei, fir) afceyfrr]. 

Mr) aKOirelre^ p,rj aKeyfrrjade. 

To be "Written. 

1. Let us render those who are incorrigible utterly 
ruined on land and sea ; and let us give to those who are 
left the speediest release from the impending fears. 2. 
Let us look attentively at his plan of administration ; let 
us not be perpetually complaining of what has happened. 
3. Would that you were not perpetually complaining of 
what has happened. 4. Look-attentively-at * my plan of 
administration: do not complain of* what has happened. 
5. Be not in the habit of setting this down as a crime of 
mine, if the enemy conquer in battle. 6. that you 
would not set this down as a crime of mine, if it happens 
to the enemy to conquer in battle ! 7. Do not wonder at 
my extravagant assertion, but observe with candor what 
I say. 8. Be not in the habit of wondering at my extrav- 
agant assertion, but of observing with candor what I say. 
9. Let us not wonder at his extravagant assertion, but 
observe with candor what he says. 10. that they 



44 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

would behold how rotten is everything by nature which 
has not been done justly! 11. Let him behold how rotten, 
as it seems, is everything by nature which has not been 
done justly. 12. Come now, let us read the testimonies 
of the public services which he has performed. 13. Be 
not in the habit of listening to the man. Do not listen to 
the man. 14. Be not in the habit of abandoning the argu- 
ment (while it is) incomplete. Do not abandon the argu- 
ment (while it is) incomplete. 15. Percontatorem fugito, 
nam garrulus idem est (Avoid the " interviewer," for, etc.). 
16. Impius ne audeto placare donis iram deorum. 

* Aorist. 



LESSON XII. 

THE INFINITIVE. 
References. 

Good., §§ 258-260; 134,2; 136, Koch, § 119. 

Note 2. Kuh., §§ 305, 306, 307. 

Had., 763, 764, 773, 774, 775. Curt., §§ 560, 563, 567-570. 

Had. EL, §§ 526, 527, 535, 536. Cr., § 663 - 667. 

Examples. 

1. 'Ap olaO on vvv /lev arrjvai, cvve\de2v, ava- 
irvevaai, ttoWcl fjica rj/xepa tcdi Bvo real Tpet? eSoaav rwv 

en; <7(orr)piav rrj iroXei, ; Do you know that now (as 

the facts have actually been), one day, and two, and three 
gave (the opportunity) to stand, to rally, to take breath, 
(gave) many of those things contributing to the safety of 
the city — (infin. as obj.) ? 

2. Ti av, 60 irov t?5? %co/oa<? ravro tovto irdOo^ (rvveftr}, 
TrpoaBoKTja-ai, %pr\v ; What would it be proper to expect, 
if this same calamity had happened somewhere within our 



LESSON XII. 45 

territory (infin. as subj. ; to expect what would be proper, 
etc.) ? 

3. Elra a-o(f)L^€TaL 7 real <f>r]crt tt poarjKeiv, 779 otKoOev 
rjKer eyovres Bd£rj$ irept rj/xcov a/jueXrjaat. Then, he plays 
the sophist, and affirms that it is suitable to disregard the 
opinion concerning us with which you came from home 
(infin. as subj. of another infin. ; to disregard, etc., is suit- 
able). 

4. Eyco vo/ju£co tov fxev ev iraO ovra Belv /Jbe/Jivrj- 
a Oat nravja tov xpovov, rov Be irotrjo-avra evOv<s err t- 
\e\rjo~6at, et Bel rov fiev ^prjarov, rov Be fir) fju/cpoyfrv- 
%ov irotetv epyov avOpwirov. I am of the opinion that the 
one who has received a favor ought to remember (it) 
through all time ; but that the one who has done a favor 
ought to forget it immediately, if it is proper that the one 
do a deed of a noble man and the other a deed of a man 
who is not little-souled (infin. w. subj. ace). 

5. Hyeiro yap avrwv e/cao-ros ov^L tg> 7rarpl tcai rrj 
firjTpl fxovov yeyevrjaOat, aWa nat ttj TrarplBt. For each 
of them considered that he had been born, not to his father 
and his mother only, but also to his country (infin. w. same 
subj. as the governing verb). 

6. 'OfioXoyels ovv irepi efie aBtfcos yeyevrjaOat; Do 
you then acknowledge that you have been unjust toward 
me (infin. w. same subj. as the governing verb and pred. in 
nom.) ? - 

7. Tirta^velro Be avra>, et e\0ot, <f>tXov avrov Kvp<p 
7rocri<T€LV) bv a v t 5 ecf)7) KpetTTW eavra) voput^etv T179 ira- 
TplBos. And he promised him, if he would come, to make 
him a friend to Cyrus, whom he said he himself considered 
better to himself than his country (infin. w. same subj. as 
governing verb and adj. pron. in nom.). 

8. Kat irap ois eire^eipet Trpcorevetv (frtXtq, BtaftaXXwv 
tows irpwrovs tovtovs wero Belv kt 7]<i a a 6 at (infin. depend- 
ing on the impers. infin. (Belv), w. same subj. as the leading 



46 



EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 



verb (Zero) and pred. QiaPaMw) in nom.). And with 
whomsoever he attempted to be first in friendship, these^he 
thought it necessary to acquire by calumniating those (who 
were) first. 



Vocabulary. 



Stand, the perf., pluperf., 2 aor., & Acknowledge, 6po\oyea>, <3. 



fut. perf. of la-rrifu. 
Rally, avvepxopai- 
Take breath, dvairveai (dvd, nveco). 
It is necessary, Set impers. 
It is proper, xpn- 
Expect, irpoa-hoKaco. 
Calamity, rrddos, ovs to. 



Affirm, (prjfiii particip. cpdo-Kcov. 
Unjust toward, aStKoy 7rept w. ace. 
Better, Kpetrroot/. 
Acquire, KTaopcu, Kroopat. 
Calumniate, Sta/3dX\o. 
Possess (perf of KTaopai), KeKTrj- 

[UU. 



Somewhere within, tvov (enclit.) To be first, TrpcoTevco (irpaTos, rj, 

w. gen. 
Territory, country, x<*>P a > as "> 1- 
Receive a favor, ev irdo-x®' 
Ought, it is necessary, del. 
Through, of time, the ace. case. 
Time, ^po'i/oy, ov, 6- 
To be of an opinion, to con- Malo, paXkov (3ov\opai. 



ov). 
"With, by the side of, napd. 
Cato, onis, Kdrcov, avos, 6. 
Quam, rj. 
Videor, do<eco, w. 
Bonus, dya66s, r), ov. 



sider, rjyeopai, r)yovpai. 
Perform, notea, g>. 
Noble, ^p^crrds', i), ov. 
To play the sophist, o~o$i£opai. 
It is suitable, Trpoo^Ket. 
Disregard, dpekeco, a>. 
Opinion, dot-a, rjs, 17. 
From home, o'Uodev. 
To be born, yiyvopai. 
Only, povov. 
But also, dXkd mi 



Vinco, vuedeo, a. 

Scio, iniarapai. 

Hannibal, alis, 'Awtj3as, a, 6. 

Victoria, vU-q, rjs, r). 

Utor, xpdopai, a>/zat, w. dat. 

Nescio, ovk eViWapat. 

Timoleon, tis, TtpoXeW, ovros, 6. 

Diligo, (piXe'a), <S. 

Metiio, yjro^eopai, ovpai ; metiior, 

/ am feared, am an object of 

dread, cpofiepos etpt. 



Oral Exercise. 



1. Atperwrepov ean fcaXw? olttoO avelv rj ^rjv at<XYjO&>?, 
It is preferable to die nobly rather than to live (continue 
living) in disgrace. 



LESSON XII. 47 

2. Ov (prjo-t, %r)v ala-j^pm, He denies that Tie is living 
disgracefully (he says ov £&> alaxp^-, I am not, etc.). 

3. Ov <fir)o-i %ti<t6lv ato-%joa>?, He denies that he will 
live disgracefully (he says ov ^r\aw ktL). 

4. Ov §r)cn fiefiicofcevai, ala^p^, He denies that he 
has lived disgracefully (he says ov fie/Sico/cci ktL). 

5. Ov <f>rjaL (3 ceo vat ala^pa)^, He denies that he lived 
disgracefully (he says ov/c efftcov teri.). 

6. "E(j)r) tovto 7roi€Lv, He said he was doing this. 

7. "Ecfyr) tovto iroirjo-eiv, He said he was about to do 
this (or, intending to do this; or, on the point of doing 
this). 

8. v Ecj)rj tovto 7re7roL7)K6vat, He said he had done 
this (he said, tovto TreTroi^Ka). 

9. v Ecj)r) tovto TroirjaciL, He said he did this (or had 
done this) (he said, tovto eirolrjaa). 

10. 'OfioXoyel ahticos el vat,, He confesses that he is 
unjust (he confesses, ci&lkos et/u). 

11. ^fjioXoyel a&tfcos y ey€vrjo~6ai,,lle confesses that 
he has been (has become) unjust (he confesses, ahacos yeyi- 
vr)jiai). 

12. 'O/jLoXoyel ahacos yeviaQai, He confesses that he 
was (became) unjust (he confesses, aZucos eyevo/jbrjv). 

13. Bov\€Tat epx^Oat, He wishes to be going. 

14. BovXeTcu eXOelv, He wishes to go. 

15. KeXevet are fir) epxeo~0ai,. 

16. KeXevei, o~6 p,r) eXOeiv. 

To be Written. 

1. They affirmed that they themselves gave (the oppor- 
tunity) to stand, to rally, to take breath. 2. We affirm 
that it is necessary that we ourselves give (the opportunity) 
to stand, to rally, to take breath. 3. What do we suppose 
it would be proper that we ourselves expect, if this same 



4S EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

calamity happen somewhere within our territory? 4. 
Those who have received favors ought to remember (them) 
through all time, but those who have conferred (favors), 
to forget (them) immediately. 5. If those who have re- 
ceived favors remember (them), and those who have done 
(favors) forget (them) immediately, we are of the opinion 
that they perform an act of noble men. 6. They played 
the sophist, when they affirmed that it was suitable to 
disregard the opinion concerning them with which we 
came from home. 7. Let us not consider that we have 
been born to our fathers and mothers only, but also to our 
country. 8. Do not acknowledge that you have been 
unjust toward him. 9. that they w T ould ' acknowledge 
that they have been unjust towards us! 10. They affirmed 
that they themselves considered the Athenians better to 
themselves than their country. 11. They thought it 
necessary to acquire these things by calumniating those 
possessing (them). 12. Do not attempt to be first in 
friendship with me by calumniating those who are first. 
13. Cato esse quam videri bonus malebat. 14. Vincere 
scis, Hannibal, victoria uti nescis. 15. Timoleon maluit 
se diligi quam metui (Timoleon preferred that he should 
be loved, etc.). 



LESSON XIII 



THE INFINITIVE (continued). 



References. 



Good., §§ 261, 262, 264. Kim., §§ 306, (d), 308. 

Had., 767, 778, 779-782. Curt., §§ 562, 563, 573, 574. 

Had. El., 530, 533. Cr., §§ 663 - 665. 
Koch, §§ 120, 5; 121. 



LESSON XIII. 49 

Examples. 

1. Kal fjbr)v €1 TO KO)\V(Tai TT]V TCOV ' EXXr}VCOV /COLVCO- 

viav 67T€7rpa/c€LV eyco tfriXiTTTra)} aoo to fir) o~ oyrjaac Xoi- 
ttov r)v, aXXa fSoav /cai Bca/^aprvpeadai /cat Br)Xovv 
tovtolctL And further, if I had sold (it) to Philip to hinder 
the union of the Greeks, it was left to you, not to keep 
silence, but to cry aloud, and to bear witness to it, and to 
make it plain to these (citizens). 

2. ( Opcov on Ttt? atrial kcli Ta? SwjSoXa?, at? e/c tov 
rrrpoTepos Xeyeiv 6 Bicokcov icryyei, ovtc eve tco cpevyoVTi 
irapeXOelv, el fir) tcov Buca^ovTcov etcaaro^ v/jlcov .... ra tov 
XeyovTo? varepov SUaia evvoifccos TrpoaSe^eTai. Seeing that 
it is not possible for the defendant to escape the calum- 
nious accusations (lit. accusations and calumnies) in which 
the prosecutor is strong from the fact that he speaks first ; 
unless each of you judges shall receive with favor the just 
(statements) of the one speaking last. 

3. JEt? Tovd' r)Kev avaiSeias coctt eroX/xa Xeyeiv &>? apa 
eyco 7rpo? tco ttJ? eipr\vr\<$ aiTio<; yeyevrja Oai real feefeco- 
Xvkcos ecrjv ttjv iroXiv pLeTCL tcoivov avvehpiov TCOV 'EXXrj- 
vcov avTr)v iroir\aacr6ai. He arrived at such a pitch of 
impudence that he dared to declare that I, forsooth, in ad- 
dition to having been a cause of the peace (with Mace- 
donia), even prevented the city from making peace with a 
public council of the Greeks. 

4. To yap fjur) aia^vvOrjvai ? oti avTiica Lit epuov 
e^eXey^6r]CTOVTai epyep, eireiBav /jltjB ottcocttiovv cpaivco/nai 
&€ivo<; Xeyeiv, tovto /jLOi eSo^ev clvtcov dvaicryvvTOTaTov 
eivai, ei firj apa Beivov koXovctiv ovtoi Xeyeiv tov 
TaXrjdrj XeyovTa. Tor that they were not ashamed, because 
they will immediately be practically refuted by me, since 
I shall appear to be eloquent in no manner whatsoever, 
this seemed to me to be most unblushing on their part; 
unless, perhaps, they call him who speaks the truth elo- 
quent. 



50 



EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 



5. Aiotl 6° eXvaav ra? trirovhas, Ta? anias Trpoeypa-tya 
7rp(orov kcu Ta? Scacfiopds, rou fir] Tiva %r)Trj(rat, 7rore e£ 
orov roaovTos 7to\€/jlos tols" EWrjcri, Karearrj. And I have 
in the first place described the charges and the differences 
which led to the breaking of the treaty (lit. on account of 
which they broke the. treaty), to the end that no one may 
ever search for (the occasion) from which so great a war 
arose (lit. became established) to the Greeks. 

6. Mevcov r/ydWero tw e^airarav hvvaaO at, t&> 
nrXaaacrOai ^evhrj y r<p (fiiXovs hiayeXav. Menon glo- 
ried in being able to deceive, in fabricating falsehoods, in 
deriding friends. 

7. UpoeliTov ravra rod fir) \veiv evetca Ta? airovhas. 
They proclaimed these things, to the end that they might 
not break the treaty. 



Vocabulary. 

Sell, 7rcoXe<o, w, f. drrodwcrofiai, aor. Cause of, atnos, m, tov, w. gen. 

dnedofirju. pf TrenpaKa, plupf. With, participating with, perd 

e7T€7rpd<eiv (see Lex., irmpdcrKco). w. gen. 

Hinder, kcoKvco. Public, koivos, r\, 6v. 

Union, koivcovicl, as, r). Council, avvedpcov, ov, to. 

Left, Xomos, r), ov. To be ashamed, a\o-yyvop.ai. 

Cry aloud, jSodco, co. Declare, Xeyco. 

Make plain, §77X00, co. Immediately, avTina. 

Is possible, eveari, tvi ; was pos- Practically, epyco ; dot. of epyov, 

sible, evrjv. ov, to. 

Defendant, 6 (pevycov, ovtos. Refute, e^eXey^co. 

Escape, pass along by, napep- Appear, cpalvofiai. 

X°H- ai - Eloquent, Beivos \eyetv (terrible, 

Calumnious accusations, lit. or powerful to speak). 

accusations and calumnies, In any manner whatsoever, 



aiTias kcu 8ca(3oXds. 
Prosecutor, 6 Slcokcov, ovtos. 
To be strong, lo~xvco. 
First, when used of two per- Truth, true things, raXr?^ — 

sons, npoTepos, a, ov. aKrjOrj. 



oncoo-Tiow ; w. a neg., in no man- 
ner whatsoever. 
Call, name, mXeco, co. 



LESSON XIII. 



51 



Because, on. 

Fabricate (for one's self), 7rAao-- 

aopai, TrKoTTOfiaL. 
Falsehoods, false things, tycvdfj, 

fr. \jrevbr)s, «. 
Deride, SmyeXaw, c5. 
Unblushing, shameless, dvai- 

o~xvvtos, ov. 
Glory, dydXkopai ; act. dyaXka>, to 

adorn, to deck. 
Break (a treaty), Xvco. 
Treaty, <nrovdai, <x>v, at; anovdrj, 

a libation. 
Proclaim, say beforehand, npo- 

<pr)/xi,f. 7rpo€pa>, aor. irpoeinov. 
That, to the end that, rod w. ace. 

8f infin. 
Search for, farea, <3. 
So great, too-ovtos, n, o(y). 



Arise, become established, na- 

Oiorapai fy intrans. tenses of the 

act. 
Scribo, ypd<p(o. 
Dico, Aeyco. 
Diligenter, ius, issime, dicpifioos, 

earepov, earara. 
Facile, ius, illime, pqbiws, paov, 

pao~ra. 
Scio, w. ace. 8f infin., otSa to. ace. 

Sf particip. For scio w. infin., 

see Lesson XII. 
Magna pars, 6 noXvs, as partitive 

agreeing in gender w. the gen. of 

the whole. 
Eruditio, padrjo-is, eco?, f). 
Rerum vocabula, to. tcov ovtohv 

6vop.ara. 



Oral Exercise. 

1. 'Eirlcnacrai velv ; Do you know how to swim ? 

Ovtc €7ricrTa/j,ai velv teal yap ovirore e/nadov, I do not 
know how to swim ; for I never learned. 

2. Aeivos eon Xe'yetv ; Is he eloquent? 
Ildvv Seivos Xeyetv, He is very eloquent. 
Aeuvos eari (pay el v ; Is he a great eater ? 
Ildvv Seivos <\>ayelv , He is a very great eater. 

3. Avtt) r) olfcia r)h[<jrrj early evBtacrao-Oai, This house 

is most agreeable to live in. 
Avttj r) ywr) evirpeirr]^ eartv i&etv, This lady is most 
comely in appearance. 

4. Opav arvyvbs f)v kcll rf) (fxovrj Tpayys, He was gloomy 

in looks and harsh in voice. 
r flpa Tj/xlv /3ov\evecr6ai) It is time for us to take 
counsel. 

5. To /jLrjSeva e^airarav^ The fact that no one deceives. 



52 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

Tod firjSeva etjairarav, To the end that no one may, 

etc. 
Tov firj&eva e^airarav eve/ca, To the end that, or in 

order that, etc. 
'Etc rov fX7]heva e^airaTav^ From the fact that no 

one, etc. 
T« e^airarav, In or by deceiving. 
Ta> fir)8eva e^aTrarav, In or by the fact that no one, 

etc. 
II ph tg5 fjbrjBeva l^airaiavy In addition to the fact 

that no one, etc. 
Aia to fjL7)heva egairaTav, On account of the fact that 

no one deceives. 

To be Written. 

1. He sold (it) to Philip to hinder the union of the 
Greeks. 2. that I had not sold (it) to Philip to hinder 
the union of the Greeks ! 3. If I had sold (it) to Philip 
to hinder the union of the Greeks, it would be left to you 
to cry aloud and to make (it) plain to these (citizens). 4. 
It was not possible for the defendant to escape the calum- 
nious accusations in which the prosecutor was strong, from 
the fact that he spoke first. 5. The prosecutor will be 
strong in calumnious accusations from the fact of speaking 
first. 6. In addition to having been a cause of the peace 
(with Philip), they had even hindered the city from making 
it with a public council of the Greeks. 7. They were not 
ashamed to declare that we had hindered the city from 
making peace, in addition to having been a cause of the 
war. 8. They would immediately be practically refuted 
by me, if I should appear to be eloquent in no manner 
whatsoever. 9. I should have appeared eloquent, if they 
had called the one who speaks the truth eloquent. 10. 
The fact that he was not ashamed, because he fabricated 
falsehoods and derided his friends, this seemed to me to 



LESSON XIV. 53 

be most unblushing on his part. 11. He seemed to me 
to glory in the fact that he himself broke the treaty. 12. 
He seemed to me to glory in fabricating falsehoods. 13. 
The city proclaimed these things, to the end that no one 
might break the treaty. 14. The city proclaimed these 
things to the end that no one might ever search for (the 
occasion) from which so great a war arose. 15. Scribendo 
dicimus diligentius, dicendo scribimus facilius. 16. Scis 
magnam eruditionis partem esse scire rerum vocabula. 



LESSON XIV. 



THE INFINITIVE (continued). 



References. 



Good., §§263, 265. Kim., §§ 306, 1 ; 318, 8. 

Had., 765, 838, 847. Curt., § § 561, 617, Obs., 3 ; 621, d. 

Had. El., 529, 572, 573. Cr., §§ 663, 713, d. 
Koch, § 120, 2. 

Examples. 

1. Tot eyco /jlovo<; tcdv irpvravecov r)vavTwsQi)v vplv 
firjSev iroielv irapa tou? vofiovs. Then I alone of the 
Prytanes was opposed to your doing anything contrary to 
the laws. 

2. KXeap'Xps Be Tore yuKpov e^efyvye to /jltj KaTcnre- 
Tp(o6rjvac. And Clearchus, at that time, narrowly escaped 
being stoned to death. 

3. KaTapvel /jlt) 8eB pafcevai TaSe ; Do you deny that 
you have done these things ? 

4. Ovtol eicriv ow? opaTe jjlovol €ti, tj/mv eixiroBwv to firj 
rjSrj elvai evda TraXat cnreuBo/jiev. These (men) whom you 
see are the only (men who are) longer in the way of our 
being at once where we have long been hastening. 



54 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

5. El Se yevrjao/jieOa eiri (SaatXel, rl 6/jL7to8cop (z=:ov$ev 
e/jbiroScop) fir) ov%l iravia t<x heivorara iraQowras v/3pt£o- 
fievovs airoQavelv. And if we shall fall into the power 
of the king, what hinders that we, suffering everything 
most terrible, die insulted ? 

6. TV? o K(o\vaa<; top * EX\r]or7rovTOV aWor pMoOrjvai 
tear e/ceivovs tol)? %p6vovs ; Who (was) he that prevented 
the Hellespont from falling into other hands in those times 
(firj is* not usually expressed w. the infin. after kcoXvo)) ? 

7. Kal tou9 eirLT7)heLov<i eire/Jb^e tovtcop €7ri/jbe\7}6rj- 
vai. And he sent suitable persons to attend to these things. 

8. Kvpos Se 2vevvea€i e&cotce ra rjpiraapieva av$pa,7roSa, 
rjv 7rov evTvyxavcoaiv, a7ro\afjb/3av€iv. And Cyrus gave 
to Syennesis (permission) to take back the slaves which 
had been carried off, if (the Cilicians) should anywhere fall 
in (with them). 

Vocabulary. 

Oppose, evavTioco, a>. Suitable persons, cmrrjbeiot, cov, 

Contrary to, napd w. ace. ol. 

Law, vopos, ov, 6. Attend to, empeXeopai, ovpai, & 

Narrowly, (a little), piicpov. iinpehopai, w. gen. 

Escape, encpevyco. Take back, dnoXapfidvai. 

Stone-to-death, KaraneTpooi, a>. Slave, dvdpcnrodov, ov, to. 

Deny, Karapveopai, ovpai, rare ; Seize-and-carry-off, dpndfa. 

usu. dpveopai, ovpai. Fall-in-with, evrvyxdveo. 

Hinder, be in the way of, ip.no- Fall-into-other-hands, be ali- 

hcov w. elvai expressed or under- enated, dWorpioopai, ovpai. 

Mood. Hellespont, 'EXXrjaTrovros, ov, 6. 

Prevent, hinder, kcoXikd. Forget, iiviKavOdvopai. 

Terrible, deivos, rj, ov. Remember, pepvr^pai. 

Insult, treat with insolence, Natura, tj cpvais, €<os. 

vfyifa' Fatior, ida>, S>. 

Longer, ert; no longer, ovk£ti, Ut, w. subjunc. Greek infin. 

Poteen {written either in one Alius, aXXos, n, o. 

word, or separated). Spolium, \d<pvpov, ov, rd; usu, in 
Hasten, anevdo). plur. 



LESSON XIV. 55 

Copia, ae, €vnopia,as,rj', sometimes irposfyacc; resistendum esse, 

plur. evTropiai. av6L<TTaa6ai Seti>. 

Augeo, avgdvco (sometimes av£<o). Iracundia, dpyikoTrjs, rjros, rf. 

Admoneo, €7ravapipvr)<rKco (eVi, Impedior, ipirobL£op.ai, w. prj Sf 

dvd, pipirqaKoo). in/in. ; also other constructions. 

Quotidie, endo-T^s f)p.epas. Plures, plura, nXcioves or 7rXetovff, 

Meditor, ivvoea, <5. ifKcLova or nXeio). 

Resisto, dvOiarapat w. dat. ; or 

Oral Exercise. 

1. 'Hfiiv ejnroScov elcri to fir) tovto 7roirjaai, They are 

in the way of our doing this. 
OvBev rjfiiv €{JL7ro$(ov ecrrc to fir) ou tovto 7roir}o~ai, 
Nothing is in the way of our doing this. 

2. TV eipyei rj/ias tovto iroir)aai ; 

Ti eipyei r)fias tov tovto 7roirjaai ; 

Ti elpyei rjfias fir) tovto Troirjaai ; 

Ti eipyei rjfias tov fir] tovto iroirjcrai, ; 

Ti eipyei r)/ia<; to fir) tovto Troirjaai ; All five expres- 
sions mean, What hinders us from doing this ? And 
if we take rl eipyei as equivalent to ovhev elpyei, we 
have a sixth expression, rl elpyei r)fias fir) ov tovto 
iroirjaai ; rendered by the same words. Cf. Good., 
§ 263. 

3. EScofce fioi olvov irielv^ He gave me wine to drink. 
EBco/ce fioi to. afiSpawoBa airoXafi^aveiv , He gave 

me (permission) to take back the slaves. 

T v rf / / . / v 

O TffllGV TOV O-TpCLTeVflCLTOS KCLTeXlTTe (pvXdTTeiV TO 

o-TpaTOTreSov, He left half of the army behind to 
guard the camp. 

4. He is in the way of my doing this, 'EfwroScov €<tti fioi 

TO fir) TOVTO iroirfcai. 

He is not in the way of my doing this, Ovk eairoBcou 
eo~Ti fioi to fir) ov tovto iroirjaai. 

5. EicwXvcre fie tovto iroirjaai^ He prevented me from 

doing this. 



56 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

To be Written. 

1. We have long been opposed to doing anything con- 
trary to the laws. 2. Those who were opposed to doing 
anything contrary to the laws narrowly escaped being 
stoned to death. 3. If they had denied that they had 
done anything contrary to the laws, they would have nar- 
rowly escaped being stoned to death. 4. What would 
hinder that we, suffering everything most terrible, should 
die insulted, if we should deny that we had done these 
things ? 5. Let us conquer these men whom we see, that 
they may no longer hinder our being where we have long 
been hastening. 6. If they are in the way of our being 
where we have long been hastening, they will die insulted. 
7. Who was he that prevented our dying insulted in those 
times ? 8. If they had not sent suitable persons to attend 
to these things, what would have hindered their dying 
insulted ? 9. that they would send suitable persons 
to attend to these things, in order that he might not sell 
(it) to Philip to hinder the city from making peace! 10. 
They would have given to Cyrus (permission) to take back 
the slaves that had been seized and carried off, if he had 
anywhere fallen in (with them). 11. In addition to hav- 
ing been a cause of the peace, they prevented the Helles- 
pont from falling into other hands in those times. 12. If 
you have received favors, do not forget (them) through all 
time ; but if you have done (a favor), do not remember (it). 
13. Illud natura non patitur, ut aliorum spoliis nostras 
copias augeamus. 14. Admoneo ut quotidie meditere 
resistendum esse iracundiae. 15. Impedior ne plura 
dicam. 



LESSON XV. 57 

LESSON XV. 

THE INFINITIVE (continued). 













References. 










Good 


,§§ 


266, 


267, 


268, 274 


Kuh, 


§§ 


337, 


9 ; 341, R. 


3 


Had., 


769 


, 77C 


>, 772, 


813. 


Curt. 


§§ 


564, 


565, 601. 




Had. 


El, 


531, 


532. 




Cr, § 


671 








Koch 


,!§ 


113, 


118,5 


; 122, 1, 


2. 

Examples. 











1. Kal Kpavjrjp ttoWtjv eirolovv tcakovvres aWrJXou?, 
co are* zeal rovs iroXefjuovs a /cove iv coo-re* ol eyyvrara 
7cov 7to\€/jll(ov kcll €<f)v<yov €K tcov (TKr)va)fj,ciTa)v. And they 
made much noise in calling one another, so that even the 
enemy heard ; wherefore those of the enemy (who were) 
nearest even fled from their tents. 

2. ' fl 'XaiKpaTes, vvv fiev 'Avvray ov ireiaoiieBa, a\\ 

a<t)L6fU,6V (76, 67TL TOVT(p fieVTOl, € <j> 00 T 6 fJ,7]fC€TL €V laVTl) 

r V ZnTrio-et Biarpifieiv. Socrates, now we will not 
yield to Anytus, but we let you go, on this condition how- 
ever, that you no longer continue in this pursuit. 

3. f O Be etirev on (TireKjaaOai ftovXoiro e(f> (p iir)T6 
auro? rovs "EWrivas ahacelv t M T ckcipov^ Kcueiv tyi? 
oltcias. And he said that he was willing to make a treaty, 
on condition that neither he himself injure the Greeks, nor 
they burn the houses. 

4. IIoWol avOpwiToi airoQvj](JKOvcn it porepov irpiv 
BrjXoL ylyveadai oloi rjaav. Many men die before they 
become manifest what they were. 

5. Hp\v% yap Br) KaraXvcrai to crrpaTevfia irpo<; 
apiarov ftaaiXev? kfyavr). For before the army halted for 
breakfast, the king appeared. 

6. Kanoi aXrj6e<; ye, <w? e7ro? euirelv, ovBev ei,pr)tcao~iv. 

3* 



58 



EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 



Although, to speak frankly, they have uttered nothing that 
is really true. 

7. UiireuTiiaL eyco e/cav elvat, firjheva aBixelv avdpco- 
ttwv. I am persuaded that I have voluntarily wronged no 
one among men. 

8. To ras ISlas evepyeala? viro/M/jLvrjcnceiv kcll Xeyecv 
fii/cpov 8elv ofioiov earv ra> oveiSt&w. To suggest one's 
own benefactions and to speak (of them) is almost like 
casting reproach. 

9. "Avev ap^ovrcov ovBev av ovre kclKov ovre ayaOov 
yevoLTO, to? fxev arvveXovrt, eiireLv, ovBafjbov, ev Be Brj 
Tot? 7ro\€fMfco2$ iravrdirao-Lv. Without commanders, noth- 
ing either honorable or good could be accomplished any- 
where, to speak in a summary manner ; but above all in 
military affairs. 

* Observe that (bare may take either the infin. or the indie. With the 
latter, it is often rendered wherefore. 

+ 'A5lk€?v is used here as a proper pres. to continue to injure; not perf., 
as often elsewhere. Cf. Ex. 7. 

X TLplv is often followed by a finite mood, but is then usually rendered 
until. 



Noise, especially of shouting or 

calling, icpavyf), rjs, tj. 
So that, & ore. 
Hear, o.kov<o. 
Terrify, eWA^rTco. 
Let go, d<fiir]pi 



Vocabulary. 

Before, sooner than, npoaBev 
irpiv, 7rpoT€pov irpiv, or nplv alone. 
Manifest, drjXos. rj. ov. 
"What, of -what sort, olos. a, ov. 
Voluntary, willing, e/ccW elvai. 
True, d\r)6r)s. is. 



On this condition, that, km To he. accomplished, take 



place, yiyvopai. 
Commander, ap^cov. ovtos, 6. 

Suggest, VTrop,ipVT)CTK(0. 



tovtg), €<f) core. 
However, pevroi. 
Contrary to, napd w. ace. 
On condition that, icft co, ore(f> Own, personal. X8tot. la, tov. 

•P 7 " 6, Benefaction, evepyea-ia, as. f). 

Make a treaty, anevSopai. Almost, oXt'you Seu/. 

Yield to, obey, neiBofuu, to. dat. Cast reproach, cWiSi'£a>. 
Anytus, *Avwor, ov, 6. Collis, yrjXocpos, ov, 6. 



LESSON XV. 59 

Celeriter, rax^s. <j>re p.r)Bels. The plur. in Greek, 

"Priusqua.m,7rp6Tepov7rplp,w.i?ifin. pjSeVer, is rare. 

Adversarius, evavrlos, ov, 6. Afficior exsilio, (pvyas e< rrjs 

A or ab, iv. ablat., vtto w. gen.; narpidos yiyvop.ai. 

ab. . .sentiatur is best expressed Ita. . .ut, outgo (s). . .wore. 

by al<r6eo-9ai, w. subj. ace. Vivo, £aa>, a>, aor. comm. ifiiaiv, 

Communio, reixifa- pf- /3e/3ia>Ka. 

Pax, elpfjmj, rjs, rj. Carus, (pikos, 77, oj/, (piXalrepos, <f)i- 

His conditionibus, ne qui, eft Xairaros, w. dat. 

Oral Exercise. 

1. To eir €Kelv<p elvai, So far as depends on this man. 

2. To Kara rovrov elvai, So far as relates to this man. 

3. To vvv elvai, For the present. 

4. To eir eiceivois elvai airayXwXeire av, So far as depended 

on them, you would have perished. 

5. (72?) e/xol Sofcelv, As seems to me. 

6. ( f ^?) ovTcocri aKovaai, or a/covaai ovrcoai, So to hear, or 

if one hear thus. 

7. (*/2?) eiKaaai, As one may conjecture, or if one com- 

pare ; &>? fiitcpov fxeya\(p eiKaaai, to compare small 
with great. 

8. 72? elirelv, or <w? €7ro? elirelv is variously rendered ; one 

might almost say, to speak generally, to speak frankly, 
to use this (somewhat strong) expression ; and some- 
times, yet rarely, by the common English phrase, so 
to speak. Plato makes it antithetical to a/cpi/3ei 
Xoyco, vjith accurate statement. 

9. e /2? avveXovn elirelv, To speak summarily. 
'fls uvvTojiws elirelv, To speak concisely. 

? i7? aVXco? elirelv, To speak simply, or ingenuously. 
To oXov elirelv, to ^v/jarav elirelv, To speak the whole 
(truth), on the whole. 

10. r Oaov ye /ju elSevai, As far, at least, as I know. 

11. 'OXiyov &elv, or oXiyov without 8elv, To want little, 

i. e. almost. 



60 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

12. 'Ekcov elvai, To be willing, voluntary, voluntarily. 

13. To 7i]fiepov elvai, To-day. 

To be Written. 

1. Those of the enemy who were nearest called one 
another, making much noise, so that our soldiers, hearing 
(it), were terrified. 2. They will let us go, on this condi- 
tion, however, that we no longer do anything contrary to 
the laws of the city. 3. We will let you go, on condition 
that you neither injure the Greeks nor do anything con- 
trary to the laws. 4. We will make a treaty, on condition 
that you neither yield to Any tus nor let this . man go. 

5. This man died before he became manifest what he was. 

6. They let these men go before it became manifest what 
they were. 7. They will die before it becomes manifest 
what they are. 8. They became manifest what they were 
before we let them go. 9. They are persuaded that they 
have voluntarily wronged no one among men. 10. He is 
persuaded, to speak frankly, that he has uttered nothing 
which is really true. 11. We are persuaded, to speak in 
a summary manner, that nothing either honorable or good 
will be accomplished without commanders. 12. If you 
were to suggest (imperf.) your own benefactions, it would 
be almost like casting reproach. 13. Collem celeriter, 
priusquam ab adversaries sentiatur, communit. 14. Fecit 
pacem his conditionibus, ne qui afncirentur exsilio. 15. 
Ita vixit ut Atheniensibus esset carissimus. 



LESSON XVI. 



61 



LESSON XVI. 



THE PARTICIPLE. 



References. 



G.ood., §§ 275, 276. 
Had., 785, 787. 
Had. EL, 538, 539. 
Koch, §§ 123, 124. 



KiiH., § 309, 3, (a), (c), (d). 
Curt., §§ 578, 579. 
Cr., § 674. 



Examples. 



1. KatToi eycoy opco t?}? t<ov XeyovTcov Bwajxeo)^ 
tou? a/covovras to irXeicrTov icvpiovs. And indeeed I, 
at least, see that those who hear (are) for the most part 
masters of the power of those who speak. 

2. 'A\)C OV/C €<TTIV, OVK 6(TTtV OTTO) 1 ? r)fjLapT€T€, ai/$p€<i 

'Adrjvaloc, rov virep tt}? diravTCDV eXevOepias kcli o-oDTrjptas 
kivBvvov apafievot,, fia too? MapaOwvu it poKtvBv- 
vevaavr a<$ twv irpoyovwv kcli tovs ev ITXaTatat? irapa- 
Ta!;afjL€vov<; /cat too? ev HaXa/mlut vav /jLa^T]aavra<; 

KCLI TOVS 67T ApjefJbtatW KCLL TTOWOVS €T€pOV<; T O V 9 6V TOt? 

Srj/jLoaiois iAvr)fjLa<Ti K€Ljjl6Vov<; ayaOovs avSpas, ovs airav- 
Tfl? oyaoioj? r) 7ro\t? tt}? aoVrj? a^ccoaacra tl/jltjs 'eOayjrev, 
Aio-'^Lvri, ov^l too? KaTOpdaxravras avrcov ovSe too? 
Kparrjo-avTas fiovous. But it is not possible, it is not 
possible that you erred, men of Athens, in taking on your- 
selves the danger in behalf of the liberty and safety of all ; 
no ! by those of your ancestors who were foremost in the 
danger at Marathon, and by those who drew up their lines 
in battle array at Plataea, and by those who fought in the 
naval engagement at Salamis, and by those at Artemisium, 
and many others, those who rest in our public cemeteries, 
brave men, all of whom without distinction the city, deem- 
ing (them all) worthy of the same honor, has buried, iEschi- 



62 



EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 



nes ^ — n ot alone those of them who were successful, not 
those alone who were victorious. 

3. Ov /3ov\o/jlcu Bua-^eph elirelv ovhev apxo /zei/o? rov 
\oyov. I do not wish to say anything unpleasant in the 
beginning of my speech. 

4. Kvpos ovtojs ereXevrrjaev, avr/p cov llepacov ra)v 
fiera Kvpov tov apyaiov yevo fievcov ftaaikifccoTCiTos T€ 
kol apx^iv a&coraros. Cyras thus died, being a man, of 
the Persians who have lived since the ancient Cyrus, both 
most royal and most worthy to rale. 



Vocabulary* 



For the most part, to 7rXeTcrroi/. 
Master, Kvpios, ov. 6 ; master of 

(adj.), Kvpios, ia, tov. 
Fight-in-a-naval-engagement, 

vavpa^ea), m. 
Salamis, SaXa/xis, ivos, rj. 
Err, dpaprdvco. 
Take up, aipa ; take on one's 

self, a'ipopai. 
To be foremost in the danger, 

TrpoKivbvvevio. 
In behalf of, vnep, w. gen. 
Liberty, iXevBepla, as, rj. 
Safety, deliverance, o-airnpla, 

as, rj. 
To be successful, Ka.Top66a>, 6a. 
To be victorious, to have 

power, Kparea). 
Alone, povos, rj. ov. 
Deem worthy of, d£io'a>, <3, w. 

gen. 
Honor, Tiprj, rjs, rj. 

To rest, to lie, Ke7p.cu. 
Public, belonging to the peo- 
ple, bnpocrios, a, ov. 



Cemetery, pvrjpa, aros, to : strict- 
ly, a monument, especially in 
memory of the dead; then, a 
place of monuments, a cem- 
etery. 

Brave, dyados, £, 6v, in a military 
sense. 

"Without distinction, in like 
manner, opoicos. • 

Bury, BdirTOi. 

It is possible, Zotlv (note the ac- 
cent). 

It is not possible that, ovk eo^riv 
O7rcos, w. indie. 

No ! by, pd w. ace. 

Ancestor, npoyovos. ov. 6. 

Marathon, MapaOav. covos, rj- At 
Marathon, MapaBav (notice 
here the dot. of place). 

To say, to speak, clireiv (only in 
aor.,pres. (pvpi). 

Unpleasant, dvcrxeprjs, es. 

Beginning, in the beginning of, 
dp-^optvos. rj. ov, ic. gen. 

Speech, \6yos, ov, 6. 



LESSON XVI. 63 

Royal, fiaaiXiKos, r), 6v. oftener to jiev...To 8e, or ra /LteV 

Rule, novo). ...to. 8e. 



Terra, xo>pa, as, 17. Ago, ere, Trparra). 

Muto, are, aWaTra, dXAa£o>, ffk\a- Simulo, are, npoo-Troieofjiai, ovfxai. 

£ja, fjWaxa, fjWaypai, rjk\ax6-qv, Perfidus, a, urn, amo-ros, ov. 

oftener rjKkaynv. Alexander, 'Akegavbpos, ov, 6. 

Mos, moris, rjdos, ovs, to ; often Morior, cnrodvr)o-K(D. 

plur. = mores. Anulus, SatcrvXios, ov, 6. 

Aliud. . .aliud, aXKo fxev. . .a\\o 6V; Perdiccas, JJepdiKKas, ov, 6. 

Oral Exercise. 

1. Ol Xeyovres, Those who speak. 
Ol XegavTes, Those who spoke. 

Ol Xegovres, Those who will speak. 

2. Ta \€<y6fjL€va, The things which are said. 

Ta XeXeypeva, The things which have been said. 

Ta Xe^Oevra, The things which were said. 

Ta, \€%67]o-o/jL€va, The things which will be said. 

3. Ta Sofcovvra, The things which seem proper. 

Ta Bogavra, The things which seemed proper, or which 
were resolved upon. The resolutions. 

Ta SeSoy/ieva, The things which have seemed proper, 
or which have been resolved upon. The resolutions. 

4. Eyoj to irpayfia el fit tovto SeBpaKox;, I have done 

this deed (lit. am having done). 
O it a pa ft as Blfcnv earai SeBcorcws, The one who has 

transgressed will have given satisfaction. 
Hfcev ayyeXos Xeycov otl XeXonrco? etv %vtvveo~i$ tcl 

a/cpa, A messenger came saying that Syennesis had 

left the heights (lit. was having left). 
Tovto virapyeiv vficis etSoTa? rjyovfiat,, I think that 

you are acquainted with this. 
TiyvcocTKoov 7rov at* to? eavTov eaTac, He himself will 

doubtless know himself (lit. will be knowing). 
9 Ho~av airiarTovvTes $iXi7nr(p, They were distrusting 

Philip. 
Eif iroccov 7roXXov<; Igtlv, He is doing good to many. 



64 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

To be Written. 

1. Those who hear are for the most part masters of the 
power of those who speak. 2. He who hears, one might 
almost say,* is master of the power of him who speaks. 
3. Those who fought in the naval engagement at Salamis 
did not err in taking on themselves the danger in behalf 
of the liberty and safety of all. 4. Isot those who are 
successful, nor those who are victorious alone, are deemed 
worthy of honor. 5. Those who rest in the public ceme- 
teries, brave men, all without distinction having been 
deemed worthy of the same honor, were buried by the city. 
6. It is not possible, it is not possible, men of Athens, 
that we erred, those of us who took on ourselves the danger 
in behalf of the liberty and safety of all. 7. In taking 
upon ourselves the danger in behalf of the liberty and 
safety of all, we shall not err. 8. It is not possible that 
those who rest in the public cemeteries erred in taking 
on themselves the danger in behalf of the liberty and 
safety of all. 9. It is not possible that we err, no ! by 
those of our ancestors who were foremost in the danger 
at Marathon. 10. Let us not say anything unpleasant 
in the beginning of our speeches. 11. Do not say any- 
thing unpleasant in the beginning of your speech. 12. 
Thus those of your ancestors who were foremost in the 
danger at Marathon died, being men most royal and most 
worthy to rule. 13. Terra mutata non mutat mores. 

14. Omnes aliud agentes, aliud simulantes, perfidi sunt, 

15. Alexander moriens anulum suum dederat Perdiccse. 

* Cf. Ln. XV. Oral, 8. 



LESSON XVII. 65 

LESSON XVII. 

THE PARTICIPLE (continued). 
References. 

Good., § 277. Kuh., § 312, 4. 

Had., 788, 789. Curt., §§ 580 - 583. 

Had. EL, 539, 540. Cr., §§ 579-583. 

Koch, § 124, 1. 

Examples. 

1. ?Zv B 6 aefjivos avr\p /cai Bicltttvcov tow; aXXow; 
CKOTrei 7T/DO? ravT7)v iroia tlvi Ke^prjaac tu^ ; Bl rjv 7rat9 
fjuev cov fxera 7roXXr}<; e^Sem? erpafyr)?, cifxa rco irarpl irpos 
tw BiBao-fcaXecw it poa eB pevcov , to [leXav rpi/3cov real 
to (3ddpa aiToyyc^cov kcll to iraiBaycoyeiov fcopcov, oltce- 
tov Ta^tp, ovk eXevOepov iraiBos e^cov, dvrjp Be yevdfie- 
vo<$ tt] fjLrjTpl TeXovar) to;? (3l(3Xov<; dveylyvwaices kcll 
TaXXa avv€o-Kevaypov y Tr)v fiev vv/CTa ve(3 pl^cov teal KpaTrj- 
pc^cov kcli tea 6 acpcov tou? t e\ov /jlsvovs real diro- 
fxaTTCOV to) irrjXa) Kav T069 TTiTvpois Kau av lgt a? airo 
tov KaOapfiov tceXevcov Xeyeiv " etyvyov tcaicov, evpov dfxu- 
vov? But you, the venerable man, and (the one) de- 
spising the rest (of men), consider in comparison with this 
what sort of fortune you have experienced, by which, when 
a boy, you were brought up in great indigence, sitting to- 
gether with your father in attendance on the school, rubbing 
the ink, and sponging the benches, and sweeping the school- 
room, having a domestic's position, not a free boy's, and 
having become a man, you read the books to your mother 
while engaged in the rites of initiation and with (her) per- • 
pared the other things ; during the night, robing in fawn- 
skins those who were (being) initiated, and mixing (for 
them) bowls (of wine) and cleansing them and wiping them 
off with clay and bran and raising (them) up from the puri- 



— — ■ 



6Q EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

fication bidding (them) say, "I have escaped evil, have 
found (something) better.".... 

2. 'Tyaet? Be v<j>op(Dfj,evot ra ireir pay pe'va /ecu 
Bva^epalvovTe^ rjyere rr)v eipr)V7)V 6/u.oj?. But you, 
though viewing with suspicion what had been done, and 
though in ill-humor, nevertheless kept the peace. 

3. Ov/c ecTiv ahiKovvra Bvvcl/lllv fiefiaiav /cTrjaaaOat. 
It is not possible that (any one) by acting unjustly acquire 
firm power. 

4. Tov clBikovvtcl irapa tovs Bi/cacnas ayeiv Bel Bl/crjv 
Bwaovra. It is necessary to bring the one who acts 
unjustly before the judges that he may suffer punishment 
(lit. give justice). 

5. e O fjbTj Bapels av0p(D7ro<; ov iraiBeverat. The man 
who has not been whipped (i. e. if he has not been whipped) 
is not (being) educated. 

6. Avr)p Bucaios ov/c 6 fir) aBt/ccov, aXk bcrri? aBcKetu 
Bvvdfievo? ov (3ov\erat. A just man (is) not the one 
who is not unjust, but one who, being able (i. e. if he is 
able) to act unjustly, does not wish (it). 



Vocabulary* 

Bring up, rpeepco. (Something) better, apeivov ; 

In, in the midst of, piera iv. gen. neut. of ape Lvov. 

Indigence, evdeia, as, rj. Read, dvayiyvooo-Ka>. 

Domestic (as subst.),oliceTr)s,ov,6. Book, /3t/3Xos, ov, f). 

Position, rank, ra£i?, ecos, 77. Mother, firjrrjp, rpos, 17. 

Free, iXevQepos, a, ov. To be engaged in the rites of 

Raise up, avicrrr)p.i ; intrans. tenses, initiation, reheco, <u. 

to rise up. Prepare with, (rvo-Kevcopeofxai, ov- 
To be initiated, reXeop.ai, ov/iai. p,ai (o-vv, OKev(opeop,ai ; fr. aicevco- 
Purification, nadappos, ov, 6. p6s, ov, caring for the bag- 
Bid, order, KeXevco. gage ; fr. (rutin, ra, baggage, 
Escape, epevyco, w. ace. Spa, 17, care). 
Evil, kqkov, ov, to. Robe in fawn-skins, vefipiCco 
Find, evplcrK(o. (ve(3pos, ov, 6, a fawn). 



LESSON XVII. 



67 



Mix a bowl (of wine), Kparnp'i- 
£a> (Kparrjp, fjpos, 6, a mixing 
bowl). 

View with suspicion, vcpopdo- 
pai, copai (vivo, opaopai). 

To be in ill-humor, bvax^paiva 
(dvax e P*l s < "' nar d to take in 
hand ; 80s, hard, ^a'p, hand). 

Nevertheless, o/xo)?. Not to be 
confounded ivith 6pol<os, in like 
manner, without distinction. 

Keep, aya>. 

Peace, elprjvn, ws, rj. 

Permanent, /3e/3aios, aia, atop. 

Power, dvvapis, ecos, rj. 

Act unjustly, to be unjust, d6V 
/ce'o), a> ; to be cidiKos. 

Greek, "EWrjv, os, 6. 

Whip, Sepw. 

Educate, 7rai5euo>. 

Bring, lead, ayco. 

Before, into the presence of, 
napd w. acc. 

Judge, or juror, dtKaarrjs, ov, 6. 



Dum velim,/)ar^'cip. of fioOXopai. 

Minuo, ere, peioco, c5 (/xeiW, less.) 

Augeo, av£-dva>. 

Risus, us, m., ye\<os, (otos. 6. 

Interdum, iviore, or 'ivff ore. 

Ita...ut, ovTu>s...cbaT€. 

Repente, ega'tfpvns. 

Erumpo, spoken of laughter, yiyvo- 

pat. 
Teneo, Kare^a. 
Nequeo, ire, ov 8vvapai. 
Mitto, 7rep.7TQ>. 
Legatus, 7rpeaftevTr)s, ov, 6; plur. 

7rpeo-@eis. 
Oro, are, alrea, a>, w. acc. ; deopai 

(dep. pass.), w. gen. 
Auxilium, often in plur., axpe'Xeia, 

as, rj. 
Mendax, acis, yj/€v86p,evos, n, ov. 
Ne quidem, ov8e. 
Verum, i, to aKnOes- 
Credo, mo-reva), w dal. 
Soleo, e'lcoSa. 
Homo, avOpwiros, ov, 6. 



Oral Exercise. 



1. Mr) Kafir)? <f>t,\ov avSpa evepyeTcov, Be not weary 
in conferring benefits on a friend. 

Mavddvcov fir) tcdfjt,v6, Do not grow weary in learning. 

2. Orav dfjLapravr)*; ri, ycdp rjrrcofievos, When you 
err in anything, rejoice if you are defeated. 

3. I7a<? avrjp, kclv BouXo? rj Tt9, rj&erai to <£o>? opcov. 
Every man, even if he be a slave, is pleased at beholding 
the light. 

4. Tavra eirparre fiovXevcov, May be variously rendered 
according to the connection, he did these things while a 
member of the council, or, though he was a member of the 



(38 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

council, or, because he was a member, etc., or, by virtue of Ms 
office as a member, etc.: ravra av err pane fiovXevav, he 
would do these things, if he were a member of the council, or, 
while a member, etc., or, though he was a member, etc., or, be- 
cause he was, etc., or, by virtue of his office as a member, etc. 

5. y Ap%op,€vo<;, in beginning, at first ; reXevrcov, at last, 
finally; huaXnrcov xpovov, after an interval of time; SiaXc- 
TTwv ttoXvv XP° V0V : &i a ^- pMtpov yjpovov, after a long inter- 
val, after a short interval. In a similar way, enrurylav 
iroXvv, or piKpov ^povov, having waited, etc.: ev ttoiwv, 
with right (lit. doing well). The participles aycov, e^cop, 
Xapcov, fa'pwv, xpw^ez/05, are often rendered by the Eng- 
lish preposition with. 

To be Written. 

1. When boys, they were brought up in great indigence ; 
and having become men, they had a domestic's position, 
not a free man's. 2. Eaising those who were being initi- 
ated up from the purification they bade (them) say, We 
have escaped evil, have found (something) better. 3. Those 
who were being initiated rising up from the purification 
said, We have escaped evil, have found (something) better. 
4. Eeading the books to your mother while engaged in the 
rites of initiation and with (her) preparing the other things, 
you robed in fawn- skins those who were being initiated, 
and mixed (for them) bowls (of wine). 5. The city, though 
viewing with suspicion what had been done, and though 
in ill-humor, nevertheless kept the peace. 6. The city, 
though viewing with suspicion all things without distinc- 
tion that had been done, nevertheless kept the peace. 7. 
We shall not acquire permanent power by acting unjustly. 
8. Xo one among men (lit. no one of men) ever acquired 
permanent power by acting unjustly. 9. A Greek said 
long ago that the man who had not been whipped was not 
educated. 10. We will bring before the judges those who 



LESSON XVIII. 69 

act unjustly, that they may suffer punishment. 11. Just 
men (are) not those who are not unjust, but those who, 
being able to act unjustly, do not wish (it). 12. Many 
men, if they are able to acquire power by unjust means 
(by acting unjustly) do not wish (it). 13. Yereor ne dum 
minuere velim laborem augeam. 14. Risus interdum ita 
repente erumpit ut eum cupientes tenere nequeamus. 15. 
Misit legatos oraturos auxilia. 16. Mendaci homini ne 
verum quideni dicenti credere non solemus. 



LESSON XVIII. 

THE PARTICIPLE (continued). 
References. 

Good., § 277, Notes 1 & 2. Kuh., §§ 312, R. 6 ; R. 8 ; 312, 
Had., 795. 6, & R. 13. 

Had. EL, 540. Curt., § 587. 

Koch, § 124, 3, 4. Cr., §§ 587, 588. 

Examples. 

1. 'AWa fir) ov rovr y ^aXerrov, (o avSpes, Oavarov 
e/ccf)vye2v, aWa rroXv ^aXerrcorepov rrovr)piav' Oarrov yap 
Oavarov del. teal vvv eyco fiev are /9/oaSu? cov icai irpeafiv- 
rrj<; vtto rov ftpahvrepov eaXcov, oi 8 efioi Karr\yopoi are 
Beivol zeal o£e£? ovres vtto rov darrovos, rrjs /ea/aa?. But 
(I apprehend) that this thing may not be difficult, — 
(namely,) to escape death, — but it is far more difficult (to 
escape) baseness ; for it runs faster than death. And now 
I, because I am slow and old, have been overtaken by the 
slower (of the two); but my accusers, because they are 
powerful and quick, (have been overtaken) by the swifter, 
(namely,) by wickedness. 

2. To rov deov arjfielov ev aXXots Xoyois rroXXa^ov fie 



70 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

eVeV^e Xeyovra fieragv. The monition of the god, in 
other discourses, checked me in many places in the midst 
of my speech (lit. in the midst of speaking). 

3. 'ATTOirXel o'Uahe, Kaiirep fxeaov yeifiwvos ovtos. 
He sails away homeward, although it is midwinter. 

4. ^Efid^ovro a/na nropevd/jbevoc oc f EWrjves. The 
Greeks fought at the same time that they were marching. 

5. "A /J* a 7]\t(p dvareWovri, K7]pvica<; kirepb^e irepi 
airovScov. At sunrise (lit. together with sun rising) he sent 
heralds concerning a treaty. 

6. EvOvs iraiSes ovres fJuavOdvovatv apyeiv re kcll 
apyevQai. In their very boyhood (lit. immediately being 
boys) they learn both to govern and to be governed. 

7. OlSe ixev yap ovBel? rov Oavarov ovh €i rvyyavei ra> 
dvOpwirw irdvrwv fieytcrTOV ov rwv ayadcov, Be&cacn B &)<? 
ev etSoTe?, on fieyio-rov rwv tca/ccou ecniv. For no one 
knows death, not even if it chance to be to the human 
being (among the) greatest of all blessings; but (men) fear 
it, as if well knowing that it is (among the) greatest of 
evils. 

8. ^vWafiftdvet Kvpov «? airoKrevwv. He appre- 
hends Cyrus as if to put him to death (or apparently to put 
him to death). 

Vocabulary. 

Because, are, before a particip. Check, restrain, eWyco. 

emphasizes the causal meaning. In the midst of, /xera^v. 
Slow, fipadvs, ela, v. Although, Kainep, before a par- 
Old., npeo-fivrrjs, ov, 6; subst. or ticip. emphasizes the concessive 

a( *J- meaning. 

To be taken, or overtaken, Midwinter, fxiaos x«/xo»>, £>vos, 6. 

dXio-Kofiai. At the same time, a/xa, before a 

Powerful, deivos, r\, ov. particip. emphasizes the tempo- 

Quick, sharp, 6£vs, ela, v. ral meaning. 

Swift, ra X vs, ela, v. Herald, k?) P v& vkos, 6. 

Monition, sign, o-qjieiov, ov, to. Send, rrefXTroa. 

In many places, noXkaxov. Sail away, anorrkiai. 



LESSON XVIII. 



71 



At sunrise, ap,aT]\ico dvaTeWovri. 

In one's very boyhood, evOvs 
nals a>v, lit. immediately be- 
ing a boy. 

Fear, dedoitca, SeoWay, dedoiite, or 
2d 8f 3d persons, dedias, deftie ', 
plur. Bedipev, 8e6oi/care or dediTe, 
dediacri(v). 

Death, Odvaros, ov, 6. 

As if, as. 

Well, & 

Not even, ovbe. 

It chances to be, Tvy\dvei ov. 

Live, {"do), £a>, ^o-o), aor. 8f pf. 
coram, e/3iW, /3e/3i'coKa. 

Great, in the sense of much, 
noXvs- 

Sit in attendance on, 7rpocre- 
dpev<o npos, w. dat. 

School, school-room, school- 
house, didao-KaXelov, ov, to. 

Apprehend, seize, avWa^dvco] 
apprehend, fear, dedoiKa. 



Act unjustly, ddtKe'co, a> ; thepres. 

often as per/. 
Put to death, dTroKTelvca. 
Wipe off, aTrofidTTco. 
Clay, 7ttjX6s, ov, 6. 
Bran, nirvpov, ov, to. 
Me juvat, rjdopai ; const, often w. 

particip. 
Pervenio, d(piKveo/j.ai, ovfiai. 
Ad finem, els or eVi to rc'Xoy. 
Bellum, noXepos, ov, 6. 
Punicus, a, una, 3>o"i>i£, 6 or 17. 
Velut, cby ; velut...fuerim, coy... 

yevop.evos. 
In parte, iv p.epei, w. gen. 
Labor, novos, ov, 6. 
Danger, Kivbvvos, ov, 6. 
Vitium, nhrffipeXeia, as, f). 
Mens, voos, vovs, vov, 6. 
Quantumvis, Kaiivep. 
Exiguus, a, um, ptKpos, a, ov. 
In majus, els Trepio-o-oTepa. 
Excedo, eicftaivcD. 



Oral Exercise. 

1. '0 "Epcos, are avros t%v fiovap^o^, eirl iracrav roXfiav 
a%€L. Eros, because he alone (lit. he himself) is monarch, 
will lead to every daring attempt. 

"Are fipahvs cov, Because one is slow. 

"Are heivol ovres, Because they are powerful. 

2. Meratjv daOevcov, In the midst of sickness. 
A e'y co v fieragv, In the midst of speaking. 

3. Kauirep ovrco croc^o? wi^, (3e\TLtov av yevoto, Though 
thou art so wise, thou couldst become better. 

Katirep ovtcos dyaOos cov 7 crocpcorepos av yevoto, Though 
thou art so good, thou couldst become wiser. 

4. 'Eiraicovi^ov apt, a Tfkeovres, They sang paeans, at the 
same time that they were sailing (inter navigandum). 



u 



EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 



"Afxa ravr elircov dvearrj, As soon as he had said these 
things, he rose up. 

5. Evdvs pe I8av rjaird^ero, As soon as he saw me, he 
saluted (me). 

Tot? fcaXois ev6vs iSovres evvoi ytyvofieOa, We be- 
come favorable to the honorable, as soon as we have seen 
(them). 

6. Hcofcpdrijv iroOovaiv a)? co^eXcficorarov ovra Trpo? 
dpeTrjs e7ri{jLe\eiav, They regret Socrates, because as they 
think he was most useful for the cultivation of virtue. 

To be Written. 

1. And now they themselves, because they are slow and 
old, have been overtaken by the slower ; while we, because 
we are powerful and quick, (have been overtaken) by the 
swifter. 2. The monition of the god in many places 
checked him in the midst of his speech, although he was 
eloquent. 3. They marched homeward, although it was 
midwinter, at the same time fighting. 4. The heralds 
who were sent (particip.) concerning a treaty will sail away 
homeward at sunrise, although it is midwinter. 5. In his 
very boyhood, he used to read to his mother, while she 
was engaged in the rites of initiation, the (sacred) books, 
and used to robe in fawn-skins those who were being in- 
itiated. 6. They feared death as if well knowing that it 
was among the greatest of evils ; although no man knows 
death, not even if it chance to be, to the human being, 
among the greatest of blessings. 7. In his very boyhood 
he lived in great indigence, sitting together with his father 
in attendance on the school. 8. In their very boyhood, 
the monition of the god in many places checked them in 
the midst of their speech. 9. They apprehended those 
acting unjustly as if to bring them before the judges. 10. 
It is not possible that you erred in apprehending those 
who acted unjustly as if to bring them before the judges. 



LESSON XIX. 73 

11. They apprehended him, on the ground that he was 
acting unjustly, that they might put him to death. 12. 
They apprehended him, as if to put him to death, because 
he was acting unjustly. 13. They raised up from the 
purification those who were being initiated, at the same 
time wiping them off with clay and bran, and bidding them 
say, "We have escaped evil, we have found (something) 
better." 14. Me juvat, velut ipse in parte laboris ac peri- 
culi fuerim, ad finem belli Punici pervenisse. (Li v.) 15. 
Vitia mentis, quantumvis exigua sint, in majus excedunt. 



LESSON XIX. 

THE PARTICIPLE (continued). 

References. 

Good., § 278. Kuh., § 312, 3, 5, 6. 

Had., 790, 792, 793. Curt., §§ 584, 586. 

Had. EL, 541, 542, 544. Cr., § 675. 

Koch, § 124, 2, 4, 5. 

Examples. 

1. Kau fiera ravra avaravTcov of? rjv em/ieXe? fcafcw 
€fie TTOielv, /cat, ypacfrds, evdvvas, elaayyeXias, ttolvtcl tclvt 
eirayovrcov pot, ov Bl eavrwv to ye nrpwrov, aXXa Sc 

cov fiaXiaO vireXdfiftavov dyvorjaeaOcu ev tovtocs iracn 

fiaXcara pev Sid tovs Oeovs, Sevrepov he hi v/ulcis kol tou? 
aXXovs AOyvaiovs eaco^o/injv. And after these things, when 
(those) to whom it was an object to treat me ill banded 
together, and brought against me indictments, accounts, im- 
peachments, all these things, not at first in person, but (by 
those) through whom they supposed that they would espe- 
cially pass unnoticed,.... in all these things, chiefly through 
the gods, but in the second place through you and the rest 
of the Athenians, I came off in safety. 



74 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

2. 'A&co Be u/za?, to dvBpes AOrjvaloc, kcli Beofiai tovto 
fie/jLvrjaOai, Trap 1 oXov top aycova, qti /jut] KaTTjyoprj- 
aavros Alcr^lvov firjBev e^co 7579 ypacprjs ovB av eyco 
Xoyov ovoeva €ttolov/jLtjv eiepov, iraaat^ o clitlclls /cat, 
fiXaacprjfjLLais afia tovtov Ke^prj fievov avdyKrj fcdfjuol 
TTpbs etcaara tcov KaTrjyoprj/jievcov fiiicpa airoKpivacrdaL. 
And I ask of you, men of Athens, and entreat that you 
remember this in connection with the whole contest, that 
if iEschines had not made any accusation beyond the in- 
dictment, neither would I make in my defence a single 
other argument ; but since this man has, at the same time, 
used all (manner of) accusations and slanders, it is unavoida- 
ble for me also to reply briefly to each of the allegations. 

3. "Xov B acpcovov kczt e/ceivov? tovs ^povovs ev Tat? 
€Kfc\r)alaL<; fcadrjfjLevov eyco irapicov eXeyov. But though 
you (or while you) sat voiceless during those times in the 
assemblies, / came forward and spoke. 

4. AXXa fcaiTrep clOXlcos kcli kclkcos tcov ctt parrjy cov 

TCOV V /uL€T€ pCDV 7ToXe/JLOVVTCOV ClVTCp OflCOS V7T aVTOV 

tov TroXefiov kcli tcov Xtjcttcov /jLvpia eiraaye kclkci. But 
although your generals carried on the war with him in a 
wretched and cowardly manner, yet by the war itself and 
the privateers he suffered numberless evils. 

5. EireLra Xeyeis a Bel irpocrelvai tco Btj/jLotlkco. cocnrep 
....Xoyco tou? Btj/jLotlkovs, aXX* ov tols Trpdy fiacre kcli 
rot? iroXirevfiacru yiyvcoo-Ko/j,evov<;. Then you tell 
what ought to belong to the public man, just as if public 
men were known by word, but not by their deeds and po- 
litical acts. 

6. Tavra ypdtyavTo? e/nov totc kcu to ttj iroXei 
avfj,<f)epov, ov to ^lXlttttco Ztjtovvtos, /3pa^v CppOVTL- 
aavres ol XPV°"rol Trpeo^et? ovtol KaOrjvTO ev MaKeBovia 
Tpet? oXovs firjvas, eo? rjXOe $LXnnro<; ex QpaKrjs irdvTa 
KaTao-Tpeyjrdfievo^ rdxel, ifov ^epcov Bexa, fxaXXov Be 

TpLCOV 7) TCTTUpcOV, 6t? TOV ' EXXtJcTTTOVTOV dcpl^Oai KCU TCI 



LESSON XIX. 



75 



%o>p/a o-axrai. And though I had proposed these things at 
that time, and was seeking that which was profitable to the 
city, not to Philip, these useful commissioners with little 
reflection sat down in Macedonia three entire months, until 
Philip came from Thrace after overthrowing all the places 
there, though it was possible, in ten days, nay rather, in 
three or four, to arrive at the Hellespont and to save the 
towns. 



Vocabulary. 



It is an object (or a care) to 
any one, eirip-eXes earl tlvl. 

Treat ill, kukcos iroulv. 

Band together (lit. stand to- 
gether), the intrans. tenses of 
crvvtcrTrjfii. 

Bring against, eVdyco, w. ace. fy 
dat. 

Indictment, ypacprj, rjs, 17. 

Come off in safety, to be saved, 
(TG>£o[xai. 

Chiefly, fiakiara. 

Through, by means of, 8ui, w. ace. 

Make an accusation, Karrjyo- 

pe'o), u). 

Beyond, outside of, e£a>, w.gen. 

Make for one's self, make in 
one's defence, 7roie'o/iai, ovp.ai. 

Argument, Xdyos-. ov, 6. 

Impeachment, tlaayyikLa, as, fj. 

Use, xpao/zai, wpai. 

Slander, ^\acr(prjp.ia, as 17. 

Suppose, v7ro\ap(Sdva). 

Pass unnoticed, dyvoeopai, ovfiai. 

Something unavoidable, a ne- 
cessity, avdynr), tjs, f). 

Come forward, ndpeip.1 (napd, 



Pew things, dXiya (u\lyos, rj, ov). 
Public man, dr)p.0Tiic6s, ov, 6. 
Voiceless, silent, depcovos, ov. 
During, Kara, w. ace. 
Assembly, eKKkrjaia, as, 17. 
Seek, £t)T€(q, co. 
That which is profitable to, to 

o~vp.cpepov, w. dat. 
Carry on war with, 7roXe/Lteco, a>, 

w. dat. 
In a wretched manner, affkicos. 
In a cowardly manner, kukcos. 
Yet, nevertheless, op,a>s. 
Privateer, Xtjctt^s, ov, 6. 
Suffer, ndo-xa. 
Numberless, p.vpioi, at, a. 
Belong to, npoaelvai, w. dat. 
Just as if, wane p,w. ace. Sfparlicip. 
Know, yiyva>o~KO) ; be known, 

yiyva>aKop.ai. 
Deed, thing done, irpdyp.a, aros, 

TO. 

Political act, 7roXi'ret;/ia, aros, to. 
Useful, xprjcrTos, 77, ov. 
Commissioner, Trpeo-fivrqs, ov, 6; 

plur. Trpeafieis, eeov, oi. 
Entire, whole, oXos, v, ov. 
Month, p.r)v, pLrjvos, 6. 



76 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

It is possible, is permitted, Necesse est, dvdynr], tjs, ^; w. 

e£eori(i>), (e£, el fit). ioTi(v) expressed or understood. 

Nay rather, paXKov 8e. Voluptas, Tjftovr), tjs, f). 

Arrive at, dcpiKveopai, ovpai els. Domino, are, apxco. 

Town, place, x<upi'oz/, ov, to. Urbs, noXis, eas, fj. 

Maximus, peyiaTos, 77, ov. Expugno, are, oc7roXiopicea), Sa. 

Virtus, dperr], r)s, rj. Imperator, dp^oov, ovtos, 6. 

Omnis, nds. ndo-a, irdv. Redeo, Ire, dvep%op.ai (dvd, ep\o- 

Jaceo, ere, Kelpat. fxai). 



Oral Exercise. 

1. r/ T ovtos eiaidt,, While it rains, or because it Tains, 
walk in. 

2. TevotT av rrrav, 6eov re^voo fievov , Everything 
would be accomplished, if a god should contrive. 

3. Ao%clvto<$ tovtov, Bo^avr cov tovtcov, Bo- 
%clvtcl TavTa, and Bo^av ravra all occur in Attic 
Greek, and are rendered, ivhen this (or these things) seemed 
good (or were resolved upon). 

4. Ovtcds exppros, or e^ovrcov, If this is so, or since this 
is so. 

5. 'Egov, when, if, though, or since it is permitted or 
possible; Beov, when (if, though, since) it is necessary; 
TrpoarJKOv, when (if, though, since) it is suitable ; Bvvarov 
ov, when (if, though, since) it is possible ; Bo/covv, when 
(if, though, since) it seems good ; Bogav, when (if, though, 
since) it has seemed good ; BeBoy/juevov, when (if, though, 
since) it has been determined ; fieXov nvl, when (if, though, 
since) it concerns any one; fjuerafieXov rivl, when (if, 
though, since) some one repents; elprj/ievov, when (if, 
though, since) it has been spoken; yevdfievov eV e/u>{, 
when (if, though, since) it has been in my power ; rt^oV, 
perhaps, possibly. If the principal verb is in a past tense, 
all these participles would be changed to the past, when it 
vms, etc., has been, etc. They may also be preceded by ©9, 



LESSON XIX. 77 

as if or ooo-irep, just as if; t»? Beov, on the ground that it 
is necessary ; &>? Serjaov, on the ground that it will be neces- 
sary. 

To be Written. 

1. When you, to whom it was an object to treat us ill, 
banded together and brought indictments against us, we 
came off in safety chiefly through the gods. 2. If they 
had not made any accusation beyond the indictment, nei- 
ther would we make in our defence a single other argu- 
ment. 3. If (those) to whom it was an object to treat 
them ill had not banded together and brought against them 
indictments and impeachments, they would not make in 
their defence a single other argument. 4. Since they have 
used all (manner of) accusations and slanders, and since 
they suppose that they will pass unnoticed, it is unavoida- 
ble for us to come forward and say a few things. 5. 
Although the other public men sat voiceless during those 
times in the assemblies, seeking that which was profitable 
to Philip, not that (which was profitable) to the city, we 
came forward and spoke. 6. But although the city carried 
on the war with Philip in a wretched and cowardly man- 
ner, yet by the war itself and the privateers he suffered 
numberless evils. 7. But although Philip suffered num- 
berless evils by the war itself and the privateers, yet your 
generals carried on the war with him in a wretched and 
cowardly manner. 8. They tell what ought to belong to 
public men, just as if the public man were known by 
word, but not by his deeds and political acts. 9. This 
useful commissioner sat down in the city three entire 
months, though it was possible in ten days, nay rather in 
three or four, to arrive at the Hellespont and save the 
towns. 10. You sat during those times in the assembly 
voiceless, though it was permitted to you to come forward 
and speak. 11. Though it is not possible (particip.) to 



EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

know death, not even if it chance to be to the human 
being among the greatest of all blessings, men fear (it) as 
if it were among the greatest of evils. 12. Maximas vir- 
tutes jacere omnes necesse est voluptate dominante. 15. 
Urbe expugnata imperator rediit. 



LESSON XX. 
THE PARTICIPLE (continued). 





References. 


Good., §§ 279, 280. 


Kuh., § 310. 


Had., 796-799. 


Curt., §§ 589 


Had. EL, 545, 546, a, b, c. 


Cr., § 677. 


Koch, §§ 125-127. 





591. 



Examples. 

1. Ovkovv ovre T?j? ef a/3%^5? €Lp7]vr)<; rjjejJLcov ovB curios 
o)V eyw (j>alvofjLai 7 ovre twv clWodv <bv Kare-^evcraro fiov 
ovSev dXijdh ov heiKvvrai. Wherefore I am plainly 
not a projector of the original peace, and not a cause (of 
it), nor does he show any of the other (allegations) w T hich 
he has falsely made against me to be true. 

2. npayrov fiev, co av8p€<; Adrjvaloi, Tot? Oeols evyojiai 
iraau Kal Trdaais, oarjv evvoiav e%a)v €jco SiareXa) rfj re 
iro\ei k(ll iraatv v/juv, roaavrrjv virap^ai \ioi Trap v/jlgov el? 
tovtovI top dycova. In the first place, men of Athens, I 
pray all the gods and goddesses, that, as much good-will as 
I continually have both towards the city and towards you 
all, so much may be extended to me from you in this 
present contest. 

3. AWa (f)i\oao(f)(p fiev eot/cas, &> veavlafce, /cat, Xeyeis 
ovk a^apiara' taOt fievroi avor)To<$ cov, ei oiei av ttjv 
ufie-repav aperrjv TreptyeveaOat rr}<; fiaaLXews hvvdfiecDS. 
Well, you resemble a philosopher, young man, and you 



LESSON XX. 79 

utter things which are not ungraceful ; but be assured that 
you are without sense, if you suppose that your valor 
would be superior to the power of the king. 

4. K\eap%o<; Be eiri fiev rou? iroXepulovs ovk rjyev yBet 
ydp koI direipr) kot as rovs err par Moras kclI aairovs 
ovras. But Clearchus did not lead (the army) against 
the enemy ; for he knew that the soldiers were both wearied 
out and were without food. 

5. Upcorov fjuev yap icai fieytarov ol dewv rj/jias oprcoi 
kcoXvovctl iroXe/jutovs elvat dXXr)Xois' bans Be tovtwv 
avvq^iBev avrw it apr) fieXr) /c&>? } rovrov eyco ovttot av 
evSai/jLovlaaifM. For, first and chiefly, the oaths of the gods 
restrain us from being enemies to one another ; and who- 
ever is conscious of having neglected these, this man I 
would never count happy. 

6. ^Aprairdras Be, eirecBrj ireiTTCdKOTa el Be Kvpov, 
KaraireBricras airo rov Ittttov TrepLeweaev av7&>. And Arta- 
patas, when he saw that Cyrus had fallen, leaping down 
from his horse, fell upon him (lit. around him). 

7. Kvpos B eirel rjaOero Bia/3e/3r) kot as , TjaOrj. 
And Cyrus, when he was aware that (they) had crossed 
over, was pleased. 

8. Tavrrjv Be rrjv rd(f)pov /3a<xi\eu? pueyas "novel dvrl 
epv/JLaros, eTrecBrj ttvvO dverav Kvpov it poceXav- 
vovra. This ditch the great king makes as a defence, 
when he ascertains that Cyrus is marching against him. 

Vocabulary. 

Plainly, expressed by $aLvo}xa.i. Well, d\\d, introducing something 
See Ex. 1. new and unexpected may some- 

Good-will, cvvoia, ass fj. times be thus rendered. 

As much as, roaovros, oaos. Resemble, eWa, 10. dat. 

Continually, expressedby SiaTeXeo. Young man, veavio-Kos, ov, 6. 

Am pleased, rjdo/xai Utter, say, X<fyo>. 

Falsely allege, Karayj/evdofiaL- Ungraceful, dxapio-ros, ov. 

True, dXrjdrjs, es. But, however, /ueVrot. 



80 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

Be assured, know, ol$a in the Ditch, rdcppos, ov, rj. 

imperat. Defence, epvpa, aros, to. 

"Without sense, avorjros, ov. Ascertain, nwdauopai. 

Wearied out, a-rrelp^Ka (otto, Voliicris, Spvis, lOos, 6, or f]. 

e tprjKo). Video, Spaa, S. 

Without food, clo-ltos, ov (apriv. Fingo, ere, 7rXarrco. 

virus, wheat). Construo, ere, irrryvvpi. 

Lead against, ayco «ri, w. ace. Nidus, veoTTid, as, fj. 

Am conscious, avvoida ipavra. Sentio, aLo-da.vop.ai. 

Neglect, napapeXeoi, a>, w. gen. Delabor in w. ace, ivrvyxdvco 
Count happy, evhaipovlfa. dat. 

Oath, SpKos, ov, 6. Medius, peo-os. tj, ov. 

Restrain, Kcokvco. Hostis, 7ro\epios, ov, 6. 
Am aware, alcrOdvopai. 



Oral Exercise. 

1. He is conscious of having neglected, Xvvouhev eavTw 
Trap 7j fieXrj kcds , or tt a prj /jueXr) kot i. 

They are conscious of having neglected, Xwiaaal o-fyiaiv 
avroLS it apt] /JbeXr} /cores , or tt aprj fieXrj kog lv . 

He was conscious of knowing nothing, 'Eclvtw avrj- 
heuv ovhev eir lctt afievos ? or eir oara/jbevq) . 

2. QalvofuiL tov,l am plainly (I appear being). 
AeiKWTCLi ov, He shows (it) to be. 

3. ' E^cov SiareXoo, I have continually (I continue hav- 
ing). 

'Eyovres SiareXovatv, They have continually. 

4. "la 6 1 w v , Know that you are. 

OvSeva oiha /Jbtcrovvra tol>? eiraivovvTas, I know that 
no one hates those who applaud (them). 

5. MefjLVTjao avOpcoTTos oiv, Eemember that you are 
human. 

Av6po)7Tov bvra aavTov ava/jbifivrjaK del, Always call 
to mind (remind yourself) that you are human. 

Me^bvrjfjLat tovto aov Xeyovros, I remember your 
saying this (or that you said this). 



LESSON XX. 81 

'Efxe/jbvrjTo elircov, He remembered saying (or remem- 
bered that he said). 

6. HktOopto eaXeoKulav ttjp iroXiv, They were in- 
formed (or were aware) that the city had been taken. 

To be Written. 

1. They plainly have as much good- will towards us, as 
we continually have towards them. 2. We should have 
been pleased, if they had plainly had as much good- will 
towards us as we continually had towards them. 3. They 
neither show the indictments which they have brought 
against us, nor any of the things which they have falsely 
alleged against us to be true. 4. Well, you resemble 
philosophers, young men, and you plainly utter things 
which are not ungraceful, but be assured that you are 
without sense. 5. If you know that the soldiers are both 
wearied out and are without food, do not lead (them) 
against the enemy. 6. If they are conscious of having 
neglected the gods, I shall never count them happy. 7. 
They knew that their oaths restrained them from being 
enemies to one another. 8. They were pleased, when they 
saw that he had the position of a free boy, not that of a 
domestic. 9. They were aware that the soldiers were 
wearied out and were without food, when they led (par- 
ticip.) them against the enemy. 10. They made a ditch 
as a defence, when they ascertained that the great king 
was marching against (them). 11. Be assured that you 
are without sense, if you suppose the king would march 
against us, after being aware that we have made this ditch 
as a defence. 12. If they had been conscious of having 
neglected the gods, I should never have counted them 
happy. 13. I am not conscious of having made any accu- 
sation beyond the indictment, although this man has used 
all (manner of) accusations and slanders. 14. Volucres 
videmus fingere et construere nidos. 15. Sensit medios 
delapsus in hostes. 

4* P 






EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 



LESSON XXI. 



THE PARTICIPLE (continued). 



Good., §§ 279, 280, 211. 
Had., 800 - 803. 
Had. EL, 546, d, e, 547, 519. 
Koch, U 125-128. 



References. 

KiiH. 



310, 260, (5). 
Curt., §§ 590, 592, 595. 
Cr., §§ 677, 618, 658, a. 



Examples. 



1. htv yap oio oti, ei rovu ovtods ervy^avev €%ov, 
ovk av avrov rj kovo [lev ev EXareia ovra, aXX eiri tols 
fjfieTepoLs opioid For I know well that, if this happened 
to be thus, we should not hear of his being in Elatea, but 
on our borders. 

2. Kai ovk ata^vvec tov avrov €t? re fiaXaKtav 
aKcoirrcov Kai Tr}<$ QiXhtttov hvvafieco^ a^icov hva OVTCL 
fcpeiTTQ) yeveaOac ; And are you not ashamed to reproach 
(a man) for effeminacy, and to demand of the same man 
that he single handed (lit. being one) become superior to 
the power of Philip ? 

3. FLax; ovk aSiKets teal heiva Troiels tovtols vvv 
eyKaXwv^wv tot ovk et^e? Xeyeiv fieXTico ; How do you 
not act unjustly, and do what is shocking, in now censur- 
ing those measures, than which at that time you were not 
able to propose any better ? 

4. Eyco Br) ToiavTi) cvLb^eBlcoKa rvyri. kclI iroXh! av 
e^cDi; €T€p eLireiv irept avTrjs irapaXenrw, fyvXaTTojievos to 
Xvirrjcau Tiva ev oU cre/xvvvofjbaL. Now I have lived with 
such fortune, and though I might have many other things 
to say concerning it, I pass (them) by, guarding against 
offending any one in those things of which I am proud. 

5. Oavfiao-Tov yap, e<fyq, rl iroTe ol /3ovX6/jl€vol KiOapL- 
%eiv rj avXetv .... ireipwvTat a>? cvveyecrTaTa iroielv o Tt, av 



LESSON XXI. 



83 



j3ov\covTai Swcitoi yevecrdac, .... iravra ttoiovvt€<; teat viro- 
/jLevovres . . . . &)9 ovk av aWcos a^toXoyot y evo fjuevoL. For 

it is remarkable, said he, how those who wish to play the 
cithara or the flute .... attempt most assiduously to practise 
that in which they wish to become competent, .... doing and 
bearing all things .... believing that they could not otherwise 
become reputable. 

6. MciXhtt av evSofci/jLoirjs, ei (paivoio ravra fir) 

IT pilTTCDV a T065 aWotS CIV ITptlTTOVGLV 67TLTl,fjL(pr)$. YOU 

would be most highly esteemed, if you should plainly not 
do those things which you would censure in others, if they 
did (them), lit. doing (them). 

7. Trj cpcovfj aafyw? tcXaieiv ecfralvero. In his voice 
he clearly appeared to be weeping (but was not weeping). 



Vocabulary. 



Happen, Tvy^dvca. 

Border, opiov, ov, to. 

To reproach, o-kcotttq-. 

Effeminacy, paXaKia, as, 17. 

Demand, d£i6a>, a>. 

Superior to, KpeiTTcov w. gen. 

To censure, ey<aXeco, eo. 

Better, ^Xtlcov. 

To propose, to mention, Xeyco. 

To be able, to have (the abili- 
ty), e'x<». 

To act in a shocking manner, 
deiva 7roie<o, £>. 

To pass by, trans., 7rapaXei7TG>. 

To guard against, cpvXdTTopai w. 
ace. 

To offend, cause pain to, Xvrreoj, 
co, w. ace. 

To be proud, o~ep.vvvop.at. 

As if, on the ground that, be- 
lieving that, as. 



Otherwise, in any other "way, 
aXXcos- 

Reputable, d^ioXoyos, ov. 

Able, capable, competent, 8v- 
varos, f), ov. 

Attempt, neipdopai, apai. 

Practise, do, ttouco, at. 

Most assiduously, most con- 
stantly, as avvex^o-TaTa. 

Voice, (pcovt]. rjs, r). 

Clearly, aacpas. 

To weep, KXaico. 

Salvus, crco?, <ro3j/. 

Advenio, dcpiKveopai, ovpai. 

Gaudeo, rjbopai (admits a variety 
of constructions ; among others, 
rarely the ace. Sf particip., as in 
the Latin sentence 14). 

Antiochus, 'Avtio^os, ov, 6. 

Securus, pddvpos, ov. 

De, nepl w. gen. 



84 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

Romanus, 'Pco/iaiKo's, rj, 6v ; Ro- Transeo, dia^alvco. 

mani, 'Payiaun, ol. In 10. arc. etV 

Tanquam, cos- Asia, 'Ao-t'a, ay, r}. 

Oral Exercise. 

1. MefjLvrjtro ev TToirjtTai tou9 TroXcra^, Eemember to do 
good to the citizens. 

Mifivrjao ev irocqaa<; tou? 7ro\tra?, Remember that you 
have done favors to the citizens. 

2. Me/jLvijao avdpcoiros a>v, Remember that yon are hu- 
man. 

Me/jivijao dvrjp dyado? elvai, Remember to be a good 
man. 

3. IIXovtcov (paiperac, He is manifestly rich. 
IlXovTelv (paivera^ He appears to be rich (but may not 

be). 

4. OlSe vucwv, He knows that he is victorious. 
OlSe vinav, He knows how to be victorious. 

5. Mepuvqao ttXovtwv tow irevrjras wcpeXelv, Remember, 
if you are rich, to aid the poor. 

6. "Ervxe irapwv, He happened to be present ; or, He 
was by chance present ; or, He was just then present. 

7. To vrpdrevfia Tpe^opuevov eXavdavev, The army was 
secretly nourished (escaped notice in being nourished). 

8. riavaat Xeywv, Cease speaking ; or, Cease to speak. 
y E7ravofjL7)v v/Jbas olrcreipcDV) I ceased to pity you. 

9. "Hhofial o-e iScov, I am glad to see you. 

^ Eiriyaipw ere ev Trpdrrovra, I rejoice that you are pros- 
perous. 

10. O Oeos 7ro\\dfa<; %atpet tou? /lev fitfcpovs pieyaXovs 
iroLwv, tou? Be pueyaXovs fiLKpovs, The deity often delights 
in making the small great, and the great small. 

To be Written. 

1. If this happens to be thus, you will not hear of his 
being in Elatea, but upon our borders. 2. We heard that 



LESSON XXI. 85 

those who fought in the naval battle at Salamis were vic- 
torious. 3. Are they not ashamed of reproaching us for 
effeminacy, and of demanding that we become superior to 
the power of Philip ? 4. Is he not ashamed in now cen- 
suring those (measures), than which at that time he was 
not able to propose (any) better ? 5. Do they not act in 
a shocking manner in now censuring these (measures), 
when it is permitted to propose better ? 6. Though they 
might have many other things to say, they pass (them) by, 
guarding against offending any one in those things of which 
they are proud. 7. Though you may have many things 
to say, in praising yourself, pass (them) by, guarding against 
offending any one in those things of which you are proud. 
8. They are not ashamed to praise themselves and to re- 
proach others, as if they could not otherwise become repu- 
table. 9. Let us attempt to practise most assiduously that 
in which we wish to become competent, believing that we 
could not otherwise become reputable. 10. You would 
plainly censure others, if they did (particip.) these things. 
11. Men often plainly do those things which they would 
censure in others if they did (them). 12. In their voice 
they clearly appear to be weeping. 13. They clearly ap- 
pear to be doing those things which they would censure in 
others, if they did (them). 14. Salvum te advenisse gau- 
deo. 15. Antiochus securus erat de bello Koniano, tan- 
quam non transituris in Asiam Komanis. 






EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 



LESSON XXII. 



VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN t € 'os AND riov. 



References. 



Good., § 281. 
Had., 804-806. 
Had. EL, 548-550. 
Koch, § 94. 



Kim., §§ 284,3, (12); 241,3. 
Curt., § 596. 
Cr., § 682. 



Examples. 



1. El yap rjv vurratTi Trpohrfka ra fieWovra yevricreadai, 
teal irporjheaav 7Ttti>Te?, kcli av wpovXeyes, Aia^Lvr], teal 
hiefiaprvpov fiowv teal fcefcpayw;, b? ovb €(f)6€y^co } ovB 
ovtcos airoaraT eov ttj ttoXci tovtcov rjv, etirep 8o%r)$ 
r) Trpoyovcov r) tov fjLeWovros atwvos e£%e Xoyov. For if the 
things about to happen had been plain beforehand to all, 
and all had foreknown them, and you, iEschines, had fore- 
told them, and had testified (to them) with shouting and 
screaming, (you) who did not utter a syllable, not even in 
that case, would it have been possible for the city to swerve 
from this line of policy (tovtcov), if, indeed, she had any 
regard for reputation, or ancestors, or the coming time. 
(The imperf. here refers to past time, and av is omitted in 
the apodosis ; yet the apod., viewed only in connection with 
the condition following it, would stand without av. See 
Gram, condit. sentences.) 

2. IToTa/uo? 8 et fiev Tt? teal aXX.09 apa rj/nlv €cttI 
BtaftaTeos ov/e oiha* tov 8' ovv Ev(f>paTr)v ol8ofiev otl 
aBvvaTov 8ia/3r}vai kcoXvovtcov 7to\€/jl[(ov. And whether 
we must cross any other river also, I know not ; but cer- 
tainly we know of the Euphrates, that it is impassable, if 
any enemies hinder (us). 

3. l A toIs e\ev0e'poi$ rjyovvTO elvai tt pateTea, 
TavTa rot? SovXols air^lirov pJr) iroielv. They forbade the 



LESSON XXII. 87 

slaves to do those things which they supposed ought to be 
done by the freemen. 

4. "AWoi? fiev yap y^pr^xaTa ecrt iroWa kcli vrje^; /cat, 
Ittttol, r)fuv Be ^vfi/juayoc ayaOot, ov? ov ir apaBor ea Tot? 

Adr)vaLoi<$ ear iv, ovBe BUai<; /ecu Xoyois BtaKptrea firj 
\6ycp /cat avrov? ftXairTOfievovs, aWa t tpLcoprjrea ev 
rdyet /cal iravrl adevet. For others have in abundance 
money and ships and horses, but we (have) brave allies, 
whom we must not abandon to the Athenians, nor must we 
wrangle in lawsuits and debates, if we ourselves also (as 
well as our allies) are not harmed in word (rather than in 
deed), but we must inflict punishment speedily and with 
all our might. (Understand rj/jtcis with avroix;, as agent 
with the verbals here.) 

5. Tov fiovXo fjuevov evBatfiova elvat o-ay^poavvrjv fiev 
Bt(o kt eov /cal aa fcrjr e'ov , d/coXaatav Be (fyevtcr eov . It 
is necessary that the one wishing to be happy pursue and 
cultivate sobriety, and avoid dissipation. (The agent tov 
(3ov\o/jl€vov in the ace.) 

6. Ilepl rcov vficv it pa/CT ecov varepov /3ov\€vo~€cr0€. 
You will afterwards deliberate concerning those things 
which must be done by you. 



Vocabulary. 

Swerve from, dcpla-rafxai w. gen. Utter a sound (or a syllable), 

Verb. adj. a7rooTare'o?. Cp6eyyop.at. 

Regard, \6yos, ov, 6. Not even, oi>8e. 

Reputation, 86£a, vs, 17. • In that case, thus, ovtcds. 

The coming time, 6 fieWcov aloiv. But certainly, §' ovv. 

Foreknow, npooida. Impassable, ddvvaros Biafirjvai. 

The things about to happen, Forbid, dnocprjui ; aor. anfmov. 

rd [leXXovTa yevqaecrOai. Freeman, eXevdepos, ov, 6. 

Foretell, irpoXeya. Slave, SoiiXos, ov, 6. 

Shout, /3oao>, co. To do, Trpdrrco. Verb. adj. irpa<- 
Scream, Kpd^co. reos, a, ov. 



88 



EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 



Deliver up, napabidapi. Verb. adj. Sobriety, o-acppoo-vvT), tjs, 17. 



napadoreos, a, ov. 
Ally, <rvp.paxos; older Att. £vppa- 

Xos, ov, 6. 
"Wrangle, dcaKplvco. Verb. adj. 6V 

aKpireos, a, ov. 
Lawsuit, dUrj, tjs, tj. 
Debate, \6yos, ov, 6. 



Avoid, (pevyeo. Verb. adj. (pevic- 

tcos, a, ov. 
Dissipation, aKoXaala, as, ff. 
Deliberate, fiovkevopai. 
Sapientia, o-o<pia, as, r). 
Ars, Text"), *?«•, V- 
Vivo, /3tdco, (5. 



Punish, ripLcopeco, c5. Verb. adj. tl- Puto, rjyeopai, ovpm. Verb. adj. 



pcoprjreos, a, ov. 
Speedily, iv ra^et. 



T]yr)Teos a, ov. 
Lingua, yXcorra, 779, tj. 



With all one's might, 7ravr\ NLoderoi,ev8vva>. Verb. adj. evOvv- 

adevet.. reos, a, ov. 

Pursue, Siaxo). Verb.adj .huaKTios, Facio, 7rparrto. Verb. adj. Trpan- 

a, ov. reos; noUco, a>. Verb. adj. iroirj- 

Cultivate, da/ceco, a>. Verb. adj. reos, a, ov. 

do-KrjTeos, a, ov. 

Oral Exercise. 

1. IToTa^o? Tt? rjfuv eo~n huapareo^^ or JJora/jLov riva 
rjiilv eari, hiafiariov, or Ilorafjiov Tiva tj/jllv eari hia^area^ 
We must cross a certain river. 

2. Trjv ttoXiv G)(f>€\r)Teov tj/jlIv (or rjfjLa^, or Trjv tto\lv 
ojdjeXrjrea rjfjilv (or 77/ia?), or 'H 7ro\t? a)(j)e\7]Tea rjplv (or 
»7^a?), We must benefit the city. 

Note. In all these forms eariv may be expressed. 

3. Tous o-u/xfjud^ov^ ov Trapahorea (jifias:) roh 'AOrjvaioir, 
We must not deliver up our allies to the Athenians. 

4. Tov /3ov\ofjL€vov evhaifiova elvai o-uHJipoavvrjv clgkt)- 
-riov, He who wishes to be happy must cultivate sobriety. 

5. TW fioaicriiAaTwv eTTL^eXrjreov (or €7Ti/jLe\7)7ea) SC 
TjfiLV (or rjfxa^^ or Ta fioo-Kr/fiara e7ri,/jLe\r)Tea, SC rjpHv (or 
t)fia<i) {early may also be expressed), We must pay atten- 
tion to our cattle. 

6. Ov irpo ye tt}$ a\r)0eta<; ri/jLrjreoq dvrjp, A man is 
not to be honored before the truth. 






LESSON XXII. 89 

7. Ta> d&ucovvTt, Soreov Bcktjv, The unjust man must 
suffer punishment. 

8. Olareov rrjv Ti>xn v > It is necessary to bear fortune. 

9. Tea vofiw Treto-reov, It is necessary to obey the law. 

To be "Written. 

1. It is not possible for us to swerve from these things, 
if indeed we have any regard for reputation, or ancestors, 
or the coming time. 2. If we all had foreknown the 
things about to happen, and iEschines had foretold (them) 
with shouting and screaming, (iEschines,) who did not 
utter a syllable, not even in that case would it have been 
possible for us to swerve from this line of policy. 3. 
Whether we must cross many other rivers also, we know 
not ; but certainly we know that we must cross the Eu- 
phrates. 4. They know that they must cross the Eu- 
phrates, a river (which is) impassable, if (any) enemies 
hinder. 5. We forbade the freemen to do these things, 
supposing (they) ought to be done by the slaves. 6. We 
must not deliver up our brave allies, nor wrangle in law- 
suits and debates. 7. We must punish the Athenians 
speedily and with all (our) might, if indeed we have any 
regard for reputation, or ancestors, or the coming time. 
8. We must not wrangle in debates concerning those things 
which must be done by us. 9. We must punish speedily 
and with all our might those who are plainly the cause of 
these evils. 10. Those who wish to be happy must pursue 
and cultivate sobriety, and must avoid dissipation. 11. 
He said that those who wished to be happy must pursue 
and cultivate sobriety, and must avoid dissipation. 12. 
It is necessary that those who wish to be happy pursue 
and cultivate sobriety, and avoid dissipation. - 13. Let us 
all deliberate concerning those things which are to be done 
by us. 14 Sapientia ars vivendi putanda est. 15. Lin- 
guae moderandum est tibi. 16. Hoc mihi faciendum est. 



90 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

LESSON XXIII. 

INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 



Good., § 282. Kuh., § 344. 

Had., 824-831. Curt., §§ 606-611. 

Had. EL, 564 - 568. Cr., § § 564, 687. 
Koch, §§ 107, 110. 

Examples. 

1. Tlves ovv rjaav ol irapd tovtov \oyot, rore prjdevres, 
teal Si ou? airavT dirtoXeTo ; "What, therefore, were the 
words spoken at that time by this man, and through which 
all was lost ? 

2. T i Be fi€L%ov €X 0L Tt? av eL7re ^ v aBiKTjfjLa tear av8po<s 
prjropo? rj ei fir) ravTa <j>povel teal \eyec ; crv tolvvv ovtos 
eupe6r)s, elra av <p6eyyei teal /3\e7T6Lv ei<? ra tovtoovI Trpoaay- 
ira ToXfjLas ; irorep ov% rjyei, yiyvwaiceiv avrovs ocit? 
el ; And what greater injustice could any one have to 
allege against an orator than that (lit. if ) he does not think 
and speak the same things.? You, therefore, were found 
(to be) such a man (lit. this man). After all this do you 
continue to declaim, and do you dare to look into the faces 
of these men ? Don't you think they know who you are ? 

3. Uorepov vfilv, co avSpes ' 'AOrjvaloi, Botcel fiiadwTos 
Aicrylvr)% 7] %€vo<? elvat ' A\e%dvhpov ; Men of Athens ! 
does JEschines seem to you to be a guest or a hireling of 
Alexander ? (I think we need to invert the order of juaOco- 
To? and fe^o? in translating, so as to convey the proper 
idea.) 

4. Kai fioi Sevpo, o> Me\r)Te 7 elire/'AWo rt irep), ttoWov 
7rotet, 07T6J? co? fieXTiai-oi ot v€(DT€poL eaovrat ; And come, 
tell me, Meletus, do you not certainly make it of much 
importance, that the youth shall be as good as possible ? 



LESSON XXIII. 



91 



5. Mr) avrov (sc. 'AfttWea} oUl (frpovTiaat, (ktvarov /cat 
klvSvvov ; You do not think, do you, that he regarded 
death and danger (or, Do you think that he regarded, etc.) ? 

6. 'Alio yap toutgw e^eTa^o/ievcov Tt? tlvos clltlo? 
earl yevriaerai abavepov. For from these things, when ex- 
amined, it will become plain who is responsible (and) for 
what. 



.Vocabulary. 



To be lost, dnoWvixai. 

To speak, to utter, per/, cipnita, 
eiprj/xcu, &r pass. aor. ippr)6nv ; re- 
ferred to the present forms Aeyeo, 
cprjpL, dyopevco ; aor. act. e\e£a, 
or etna, ei-irov. 

To dare, ToA/zaoo. 

To look, (S^enco. 

Face, npoo-omov, ov, to. 

To think, to have in mind, (frpo- 
veco, c5, r)o-(o. 

Hireling, /utcr^eord?, ov, 6. 

To make of much importance, 
nep\ noWov Troielo-Oai. 

The youth, the younger men, 
ol veoarepoi. 

To examine, e£era£o). 

Plain, apparent, (pavepos, d, ov. 

Responsible, afrios, a, ov, w. gen. 

An injustice, an unjust act, 
dbiKTjpa, citoq, to. 

Allege, speak of, elnelv. 

Against, kcito w. gen. 



An orator, prjrcop, or, in courteous 

language, dvrjp prp-a>p, opos, 6. 
Nonne ? ov ; 
Num ? p,fj ; 
Is... qui, oo-tis. 
Generosus, yevvaios, a, ov ', comp. 

-oTepos', sup. -OTdTOS. 
Optimus, a, um, apto~ros. n, ov. 
Fauces, (pdpvy£, vyoy, later vyyos, 

77, less freq. 6. 
Uro, Kaico. 
Sitis, dtya, rjs, rj. 
Aureus, ^pvoovs, rj, ovv. 
Poculum, €K7ra>p.a, citos, to. 
Qusero, £wt€g>, <», -rjaco. 
Utrum...an, iroTtpov (or noTepa) 

...rj. 
Memini, nep.vvp.at. 
Parum, p.i<p6v. 
Satis, dpKovvToos. 
Intelligo, voeco, <o, •r]o~a>. 
Sententiam muto, p.€Ta(3ov\evo- 

p.ai. 



Oral Exercise. 



1. Aeyeral tl kcllvov ; Is anything new reported ? 

2. ' Apa Xeyerai tl kclivov ; Is (then) anything new 
reported ? 



02 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

3. 9 H %€j€ral to kclivov ; Is (indeed) anything new 
reported . ; 

4. Ou Xeyeral ti kcllvov ; Is n't something new reported ? 

5. Mi) Xeyeral tl kclivov ; There is not anything new 
reported, is there ? 

6. Tl kclivov Xeyerat ; What new thing is reported ? 

7. "Hpero ti (or o tl) kclivov XeyoiTo, He inquired what 
new thing was reported. 

8. UoTEpOV TCIVTCL TTaVTCL TTOLWV t)BIk6L 7} OV ', Did lie, 

in perpetrating all these things, act unjustly or not ? (Im- 
plies an affirmative answer.) 

9. Kcll iroTepov (fcavrjvai Tiva twv EXXtjvcov tov tclvtcl 
KcoXvaovTa Troielv avTov e%pr}v r) fir] ; And was it neces- 
sary that some one of the Greeks appear (as) the one to 
hinder him from doing these things or not ? (Implying a 
negative answer, and uttered with bitter irony.) 

10. "AXXo ti r) ahiKov/iev ; Are we not certainly acting 
unjustly ? 

11. Tl fiadwv (or ti Tradcov) dBiKels tt)v waTplha ; Why 
(emphatic) are you wronging your country ? (Lit. Having 
learned what, having experienced what, etc.) 

12. KaTiv o7rov r)<yavdKTr)o~a<z ; Where (emphat.) did 
you express your indignation ? (Lit. Is there a place where, 
etc.) 

13. The learner cannot make himself too familiar with 
the common words, ti; what or why? Bia tI ; why? 
7tot€ ; when ? ttov ; where ? ttol ; whither ? 7377 ; which 
way or how ? iroOev ; whence ? 7r&>? ; how ? iroaov ; 
how much ? iroaa ; how many ? irolov ; irola ; what sort 
of ? irrjvUa ; at what (precise) time ? irrfkUofs ,- how old 
or how la rue \ 

14. HpOflTJV TW (t/, TTold, 7TC0?, 7TOT€, Or OCTTIS, O Tl, 

owoia, 07T©?, oiTOTe) XeyoL. I asked who (what, what sort 
of things, how, when, he) spoke. 



LESSON XXIII. 93 



To be Written. 

1. What words, through which all was lost, did this 
man then utter ? 2. I asked him what- sort of words were 
then uttered, through which all was lost. 3. Do you dare 
to look into the faces of these men, after uttering words 
(lit. having uttered) through which all was lost? 4. How 
do they not act unjustly and do what is shocking, if they 
do not think and speak the same things ? 5. When these 
words were uttered by this man, did n't he think they 
knew who he was ? 6. Did he seem to you to be a guest 
or a hireling * of Alexander, when he uttered those words 
by which all was lost ? 7. Do you not certainly make it 
of much importance that the youth shall pursue and culti- 
vate sobriety and avoid dissipation ? 8. You do not think, 
do you, that any other river also must be crossed ? 9. If 
these things had been examined, it would have become 
plain who was responsible (and) for what. 10. Do you 
think they know who we are, or not ? 11. Do you think 
any one could have a greater injustice to allege against an 
orator than that (lit. if) he does not think and speak the 
same things ? 12. They asked whether he seemed to be a 
guest or a hireling* of Alexander. 13. Nonne is genero- 
sissimus qui optimus ? 14. Num tibi quum fauces urit 
sitis, aurea quseris pocula ? (When thirst burns your throat 
for you, you do not . . . . , do you ?) 15. Utrum hoc tu 
parum meministi, an ego non satis intellexi, an mutasti 
sententiam ? 



* Observe the order in the Greek sentence. 



94 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

LESSON XXIV. 
NEGATIVES. 
References. 

Good., § 283, 1, 2. Ktm., §§ 259, 5 ; 318, 1, 2, 3. 

Had., 832 - 836. Curt., § § 612 - 616. 

Had. El., 569, 570. Cr., § 686. 
Koch, § 130, 1, 2, 3. 

Examples. 

1. Kal el /J>r)* irpoe^avea-TTj/jiev fiiKpov, ovB ava\a/3elv 
av r)hvvr)6r)iAev. And, unless we had rallied a little before- 
hand, we should not have been able to recover. 

2. 'O 8' a)? airrjXOe KivBvvevcras kcli artfiaadecs, fiov- 
Xeverai oVo)? /jbrjirore ert earai erri ra> aSeXcfxp. And 
when he had gone away, .having incurred danger and hav- 
ing been dishonored, he considers how he shall never after- 
wards be (or, he plans that he may never afterwards be) in 
the power of his brother. 

3. ' Eoifca yovv toutov ye o-fitKpat tivi avra) tovtw ao(j)co- 
repos elvat, oti a yut] olha ovBe oio\±ai eihevau. At any rate, 
I seem to be wiser than this man in this very thing, a cer- 
tain small particular, that, what I do not know, I do not 
even think I know. 

4. O 8e avTtp Xeyet • fir) vroirjar)? ravra • f et Se fir], 
efyrj, aiTtav e£et? ? eirei tcai vvv rives rjhrj ae aiTiwvTai, ore 
ou tcl^u e^epireu to arpdrevfia. And he says to him, Don't 
do this : if you do, said he, you will have blame, since even 
now some persons already blame you, because the army does 
not quickly withdraw. 

5. Kat o ZwKpaTT)? viroirrevaas fir] ri 7T/oo? rrjs iroXews 
a vttclltlov etr) Kvp<p (piXov yeveaOai, on eSotcei, 6 Kvpos 
7rpodv/jLCQ<; rots AarceSaL/jLovioLS eV^ Ta? ' Adr\va<$ (rvfiiroXe- 



LESSON XXIV. 



95 



fArjaac, o-v/h/3ov\€V€l to> 'Eevocpcovrt, ekddvra et? AeXcpovs 
dvcucoivwcrai ra> deep irepl t?5? iropeia^. And Socrates, sus- 
pecting that if would be some ground of accusation against 
him (Xenophon) on the part of the city, that he became a 
friend to Cyrus, because Cyrus seemed to co-operate zeal- 
ously with the Lacedaemonians in the war against Athens, 
advises Xenophon, on going to Delphi, to consult the god 
concerning the expedition. 

6. f flare ov rovro BeBotKa fir) outc e^o> b rt Ba) ifcdaTG) 
rwv (f)L\cov, av ev yevrjrac, aWa firj ovtc e%co i/cavovs oh 
Bco. Accordingly I do not fear this, that I may not have 
anything to give (lit. what I may give) to each of my 
friends, if (our enterprise) turn out well, but that I have 
not (persons) enough to whom I may make presents. 

For examples of fir] in wishes, cf. Ln. X. ; for fir) in pro- 
hibitions and exhortations, cf. Ln. XL 

* Notice that fxrj is used in the protasis and ov in the apodosis of all 
conditional sentences. 

+ Note carefully the peculiar use of el 8e fi-q. Rendered affirmatively 
after a negative sentence ; negatively, after an affirmative. 



Vocabulary. 

Unless, el \ir\ to. indie, or optat., In the power of, dependent 

iav fir) iv. subjunc. upon, eVi w. dat. 

To rally beforehand, npo^avi- At any rate, yovv. 

o-rafiai, to. j)f. plupf. #• 2 aor. in Statesman, koXitikos, ov, 6. 



the act. voice. 
To recover, avaka^ava). 
To go away, dnepxofiai. 
To plan, (HovXevopai. 
Never, ovnore, prjirore, ovdenore, 

lin&ivoTe ; never up to the 

present time, otiSe7rd>7rore, p.n- 

Se7ro)7rore. 
Afterwards, in the sense longer, 



The most, the many, ol noWoi 

To suspect, v7ronT6V(o. 

Some ground of accusation, 

vnaiTiov to. 
Zealously, 7rpo6vp.a>s. 
To co-operate with in a war 

against, o-vpTroXepeco, & w. dat. 

followed by eni iv. ace. 
To turn out well, to succeed, 

ev yiyvopai. 



96 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

Enough, sufficient, itcavos, rj, ov. Aut...aut, rj...rj. 

Ne, fir). Now, in a negative wish, or prohi- 
Cedo, eiKo>, -£o>. w. dat. bition, fir). 

Malum, kclkov, ov, to ; bva-rvx^, Tento, are, Tretpdofiai, afiai. 

as, f}. Perficio, ere, anorexia, <5. 

Oral Exercise. 

1. Mr) ravra 7rolei, Don't continue to do this * (or, 
Don't be in the habit of doing this). 

2. Mr) ravra Troir\o-r)s, Don't do this. 

3. Mr) ravra rroLwfiev, Let us not continue to do this 
(or, Let us not be in the habit of doing this). 

4. Mr) ravra 7rocrjo-co/jL6v, Let us not do this. 

5. MrjSeh vficov ravra Troir]aeiev, May no one of you do 
this. 

6. EtOe /jLrjBeis vjjlcdv ravra eiroir)<jev ! that no one 
of you had done this ! 

7. E/3ov\evero oVo)? av firjirore ert elrj eiri ra> aBeXcJMp, 
He planned that he might never again be in the power of 
his brother. 

8. Mr) ye'voiro, May it not happen. Mr) 6opv^r]ar)re^ 
Don't make a noise. 

9. SeaaaaOe, a>? aaOpov eari rrav, 6 rt lev fir] BiKaicos 
y weir pay [xe'vov, Behold, how rotten is everything which 
has not been justly done. 

10. IIavroj$ ouTco? e%et, lav re ov (prjre eav re (frrjre, 
It is wholly thus, whether you deny or affirm it. (Xo- 
tice here ov, after edv, used to negative the single word 
(prjre.) 

11. AeBoaca fir) e7n,\ada>fie6a rrj? o'lfcaSe 6Bov, I fear that 
we may forget the way home. 

12. Mr) ravra rroiiqo-rjs • el Be fir], alrlav efet?, Don't do 
this ; if you do, you will receive blame. 

13. El fir) Ka/jLois, ovk av evBaifjLovoirjs, If you should 
not labor, you would not be happy. 



LESSON XXIV. 97 

14. "Orav jjlt) tcd/jLvr)<;, ov/c ev&ac/jLoveLS, When you do not 
labor, you are not happy. 

15. Mr) eiriXaBw^eOa tovtcov. 

* ravra is often better rendered simply this than by the clumsier phrase 
these things. 

To be Written. 

1. Unless they rally a little beforehand, they will not 
be able to recover. 2. Having gone away, they planned 
that they might never afterwards be in the power of the 
king. 3. At any rate, they seemed to be wiser than the 
statesmen in this, that, what they did not know, they did 
not even think they knew. 4. If you do not think you 
know what you do not know, you will be wiser than the 
most (of men). 5. Don't think you know what you do 
not know ; if you do, you will manifestly not be (a) wise 
(man). 6. We suspected that it would be some ground 
of accusation against us on the part of the city that we 
became friends to Cyrus. 7. They suspected that it would 
be some ground of accusation against them on the part of 
the city, that they zealously co-operated with the Lacedae- 
monians in the war against Athens. 8. They did not fear 
that they might not have anything to give (lit. what they 
might give) to each of their friends, if (their enterprise) 
should turn out well, but that they might not have (friends) 
enough to whom they might make presents. 9. Do not 
fear that you would not have anything to give to each of 
your friends, if (your enterprise) should turn out well. 
10 * If they had come off in safety and with success, they 
would not have suffered those things which I could wish 
they had never suffered. 11 * May not the gods sanction 
these things, but may they put even in these men some 
better mind and heart. 12. I fear that the gods may not 
put in these men a better mind and heart. 13. Ne cede 
malis. 14. Aut non tentaris aut perfice. 

* Cf. Ln. X. 
5 6 



EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

LESSON XXV. 

NEGATIVES {continued). 



KfJH., 


§ 318, 4 


-8. 


Curt., 


§§ 617, 


618. 


Cr, § 


686. 





Good., § 283, 3, 4, 5, 6. 
Had., 837-840. ' 
Had. EL, 571, 572, 574. 
Koch, § 130, 4, 5, 13. 

Examples. 

1. Nat, cprjaiv, aWa to tov KecpaXov rcaXov, to firjSe- 
fjiiav ypatprjv cpvyeiv. /ecu vrj Ai evBaifiov ye, aXXa ti 
fiaWov 6 iroXXdicis fxev cpvy cov, fJu^heTrcoiroTe £' efe- 
Xey^Oil^ dBi/ccov, ev eyfcXrj/jLciTi yiyvoiT av Bia tovto 
hiKaito? ; Yes, says he, but that which was honorable in 
Kephalus was the fact that he was never prosecuted. And, 
by Zeus ! it was a lucky thing indeed. But why would he 
who has been often prosecuted, and never yet convicted of 
wrong-doing, fall under censure any the more justly on this 
account ? 

2. Ov yap av /just utt eiOeiv u/xa? €%rjT€i \xi] TOiavTf]^ ovar)? 
•nj? virap^ovcrr}^ vTroXrj-^rect)? irepl ixarepov. For he would 
not seek to change your persuasion, if such were not the 
existing opinion concerning each of us two. 

3. IIoWcikis dpa et? eppovcov /xvpicov fjirj cppovovvT(ov 
/cpeiTTcov €lttI KaTOb tov ltov Xoyov. Often, then, according 
to your argument, one man, if he reflects, is superior to ten 
thousand men, if they do not reflect. 

4. Tr\v KepKvpav €{3ovXovto /j,r) ir poecrO ai KopivOiois. 
They wished not to abandon Corcyra to the Corinthians. 

5. AlyivrjTai Te cfiavepcos fxev ov irpeo-(BevoiJLevoi,BeBiOTe<; 
tou? A6r)vaiov<$, tepvefra Se, ov% TjKicrTa fiet avTcov evrjyov 
tov 7ro\€fAOV, XeyovTes* ov k elvai avTOVo\ioi KaTa tcl? 
LTTrovhas. And the iEginetans, going as envoys not openly, 



LESSON XXV. 99 

but secretly, through fear of the Athenians, helped on the 
war not a little in conjunction with them (the Corinthians), 
declaring that they were not free according to the treaty. 

6. Ovtos yap eBo/cet, iroWa rjBrj a\r)6evaa.L rocaura, ra 

OVTCL T€ ft)? OVTCL KOC TOL fl7) OVTCL G)? OV K OVTCL. For this 

man seemed to have reported many such things truly 
already, both those things existing as existing, and those 
things not existing as not existing (i. e. if they did not 
exist, he reported truly the fact that they did not exist). 

7. *0 fjLrjBev aBucwv ovBevos BetTat, vojjlov. He that 
does no injustice needs no law (i. e. if a man do no injus- 
tice, etc.). 

8. To fjLT] Blkcllov epyov ov \r\6ei Oeovs. The unjust act 
does not escape (the) gods (i. e. if any act is unjust, it does 
not, etc.). 

For examples of pur] w. the infin. dependent on verbs 
which contain a negative idea, cf. Ln. XIV. 

* Note here Xeyu w. an infin. & neg. ov. 

Vocabulary. 

To be prosecuted, to be put To abandon, irpoUpai. 

on trial (as a law term), favya, Corey ra, Kepicvpa, as, 17. 

or, more full}/, ypacprjv (pevyoa. To help on, ivayoa, -£o>. 

To convict, e^Xeyxco, -£o>. Not a little, ovx fjiao-Ta. 

Justly, diicaiws. Free, autonomous, avrovopos, ov. 

On this account, dia tovto. To tell the truth, to report 
To fall under, come under, yly- truly, ak-qQcvco, -ewco. 

vopai iv to. dat. To be opposed to, evavrioopai, 
Censure, cyKkrjpa, aros, to. -ovpat. 

Lucky, fortunate, etdalpcov, ev- Contrary to, napd W. ace. 

haipov. To deny, Karapveopai, -ovpat. 

To reflect, to think, eppoveco, co, In the way of, ip-rrohaiv. 

-170-0). To need, require, deopai w. gen. 

Opinion, vnokr)y\ns, ea>s, rj- Favor, (poftos, ov, 6. 

To change one's opinion by Capio, spoken of fear, ipniirrai w. 

persuasion, peTanctOco ic. ace. dat. 

of 'per 'S. Miles, o-TpaTiarqs, ov, 6. 



100 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

Ne, jut;. Ut, after the notion of fear, pfj ov. 

Mortiferus, a, um, Kaipios, la, iop. Labor, irovos, ov, 6. 

Vulrius, rpavpa, aros, to. Sustineo, dvexopai (ava, ex<o) w. 
Tiineo, beboiKa. ace. 



Oral Exercise. 

1. N6/m%6 firjBlv elvai twv avQ pwmvoav (3ej3ai,ov, Con- 
sider that nothing in human affairs is sure. 

2. $o\ to pur) aiyrjaac Xolttov riv, aWa fioav, It was 
left for you, not to keep silence, but to cry aloud. 

3. El Beivov koXovglv Xeyevv rov TaXrjdr) Xeyovra, o/uloXo' 
yoir\v av eycoye ov Kara toutou? eivai prjrcop, If they call 
the man who speaks the truth eloquent (Seivov Xeyeiv), I, 
for my part, should acknowledge that I am an orator not 
after their sort. 

4 Iva fjsrjSev eira'xPh Xeyco, .... to say nothing 

offensive. 

5. Ov ra prj/juara Ta? olfceiorrjTas 6(f>7] ffeffaiovv, aXXa 
to TauTa avficfrepetv, Not the words spoken, said he, confirm 
alliances, but the fact that the same things are profitable to 
both (parties). 

6. Ov k e^acrav levai, They refused to go. 

7. OvBeiror advpuelv rov kclkw? irparTovra Bel, It is 
necessary that the one who is unfortunate never be dis- 
heartened. 

8. HvavTiod07)v /jbrjSev iroielv irapa tovs vbfiovs, I was 
opposed to doing anything contrary to the laws. 

9. Ol fjLT) el8oT€$, Any who m&y not know. Ol ov/c elBo- 
T6?, Those who do not know. 

10. Ol fMr) ayaOol, Any who are not good. Ol ovk aya- 
6ol\ Those who are not good. 

11. O fir) Bapeh avOpwiro? ov iraiBeverai, If any man 
has not been flogged, he is not educated. 

12. Mi/cpov e^efyvye to fir) fcciTcnreTpcoOrjvai, He narrowly 
escaped being stoned to death. 



LESSON XXV. 101 

13. Mr) yevoLTo, May it not happen. (God forbid!) 

14. Ovtc av Svvato, /jltj fca/uoov, evScu/juovelv, You could 
not be happy, if you have not been weary (or, if you have 
not had trouble). 

To be Written. 

1. The man who has been often prosecuted, and never 
convicted of wrong- doing, would not justly on this account 
any the more fall under censure. 2. It is a lucky thing 
indeed, if he has never yet been prosecuted, nor fallen under 
censure. 3. Ten thousand men, if they do not reflect, are 
not superior to one man, if he reflects. 4. If such were 
not the existing opinion concerning each of us two, I should 
seek by persuasion to change your opinion (or, I should 
seek to change your persuasion). 5. According to your 
argument, he would never be convicted of wrong-doing, 
even if he should be prosecuted. 6. They declared that 
they did not wish to abandon Corcyra to the Corinthians. 
7. Wishing not to abandon Corcyra to the Corinthians, they 
helped on the war not a little. 8. In declaring that they 
were not free according to the treaty, they seemed to tell 
the truth. 9. that he would report all things truly, 
both the things existing, as existing ; and if things do not 
exist, as not existing! 10. They declared that they were 
opposed to doing anything contrary to the laws. 11. In 
denying that they have done these things, they speak the 
truth. 12. They deny that they are in the way of our 
being where we have long been hastening. 13. Those 
who do no injustice (i. e. if they do, etc.) need no law. 

14. Pavor ceperat milites, ne mortiferum esset vulnus. 

15. Timeo ut has labores sustineas. 



102 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 



LESSON XXVI. 

TWO OR MORE NEGATIVES IN ONE SENTENCE. 

References. 

Good., § 283, 7, 8. Kim., § 318, 6. 

Had., 843-848. Curt., §§ 619-622. 

Had. EL, 573, 577, 578. Cr., § 686. 

Koch, § 130, 7-11. 

Examples. 

1. Ov tolvvv 67roi7)cra<; ovSa/jLov tovto, ovB rjfcovcre 
gov Tavrrjv ttjv (fxovrjv ovBels. You did not, therefore, do 
this anywhere, nor did any one hear from you this language. 

2. Kal ovSevos eiirovro^ evavrtov ovoev, ov k elirov 
fiev ravra, ov k eypatya Se, ovo' eypatya fiev, ov k eirpecr- 
(Bevaa Se, ovo eir pea fiev a a fiev, ov k eireiara he ©rjftaiovs. 
And when no one said anything in opposition, I did not say 
these things and fail to write a resolution, nor did I write a 
resolution and fail to go as envoy, nor did I go as envoy and 
fail to persuade the Thebans. 

3. *AX)C otl y ov'%1 hi evheiav ovk e7re8o)Kas, Ik tov- 
tcov hrjXov. But that you certainly did not on account of 
want fail to give, is plain from these things. (The force of 
ovyi extends to the whole clause introduced by otl : ovk 
negatives only e7reS&)«;a?.) 

4. Ov yap otjttov Krrjcrt^covra fiev hvvarac Slookelv Bl 
€{ie 7 efie o ? eiirep e^eXey^euv evofih^ev, avrov ov k av 
eypayfraro. For surely he cannot prosecute Ctesiphon on 
my account, and he would not have failed to indict me 
directly (lit. efie .... avrov, me myself), if he supposed he 
would convict me. (The force of the first negative, ov, 
extends over both sentences, and united with ovk becomes 
equivalent to an affirmative, = he would have indicted me 
directly, if, etc.) 



LESSON XXVI. 103 

5. Kal ravra /jlol nravra 7reiroi7)raL^ Kal ouSet? fir)7ro6 
evprj, to tear e/jue, ovSev eWeLcpOev. Both all these things 
have been done by me, and no one shall ever find anything, 
so far as depends on me, neglected. 

6. Kal hticrjv ovSels ovSeficav jmt] Sa>. And no one 
certainly shall suffer any punishment. 

7. El $e yevrjaofieOa eirl ftaatXel, rl e/iTroBcop fir} ov^l 

vftpi&fievovs diroOavelv ; And if we shall fall into the 

power of the king, what will prevent our dying insulted ? 
(The infin. w. fir) ov is rendered affirmatively after a nega- 
tive expression, or question implying a negation.) 

8. 'flare ttclglv aLO"%vvr)v elvac fir) ov avairovSa^eiv. 
So that all were ashamed. not to unite in helping zealously. 
(The infin. w. fir) ov is rendered negatively after an expres- 
sion denoting shame, fear, impossibility, and the like.) 

Vocabulary. 

Nowhere, ovdapov, or sometimes To neglect, eXXetVo), -^/(o (eV, 
ovdaprj. XeiVco). 

Language, voice, (peovfj, rjs, r). To prevent, to be in the "way 
To hear from a person, dicovQ) of, epnoSdiv elvai. 

w. gen. To be insulted, vppifypai. 

To write a resolution, to pro- To fall into the power oi,ytyvo- 

pose a bill, ypd(pu), -\j/(o. pat eVt w. dat. 

To go as envoy , npeafieiHo, -eveno. Am ashamed, alcrxvvopai, or al- 
On account of, did w. ace. axvvrj pot iunv. 

Want, evdeia, as, rj. To unite in helping zealously, 
To indict, ypdcpopai, -yp'opai. crv(mov8d^co, -crco. 

So far as depends upon, to Fellowship, noivoovia, as, rj. 

Kara w. ace. In no way, ovbapcos. 

Oral Exercise. 

Negation repeated and strengthened. 

1. 'Eyco 6° ovSev ovZafxov, I had nothing to do with the 
affair anywhere (lit. I nothing nowhere). 

2. Ovhevl ovBa/irj ovSafiws ovSe/jbiav KOLVwvtav £%££, He 



1Q4 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

has no fellowship with any man, anywhere (ovSafir}^ in any 
way. 

3. Oi'6ei> yap. ...ovr aia^pov ovr arifiov eo~u , oir- 
olov o v rcov acov re Kajicov ovk oirioir eyco kclkcov. For there 
is nothing, either shameful or dishonorable, which I have 
not seen among your calamities and mine (ov....ovk re- 
peated for emphasis). 

Two negatives equal to an affirmative. * 
4 OvBels dhifccov tlctlv ovk dirohwcret,, No one that acts 
unjustly will fail to pay the penalty (i. e. every one.... will 
pay, etc.). 

5. Mrj ovv....<ov vfias ovtos e^rfiraTTfae fir) Sorco Blkt]v, 
Let him not, therefore, for those things in which he has 
deceived you, fail to suffer punishment (i. e. let him suffer, 
etc.). 

6. Tcov opcovTcov ovBec? ovk eiraa^e rt, rr)v yjrvxrjv vir 
eKelvov, No one of those beholding failed to be influenced 
somewhat in his heart by him (i. e. every one was influ- 
enced, etc.). 

M^) ov w. the infin. after verbs of hindering, denying, etc., w. a negative 
rendered affirmatively. 

7. Eyco rot ovk a/icfiicr/3rjTCD fir) ov%l ere eXvai crocpci)' 
repov r) e/j,e, I do not dispute that you are wiser than I. 

8. Ov KcoXvofxeSa fir) ov fiadelv, We are not hindered 
from learning. 

9. Mr) 7rapf)s to fir) ov cfipdcrai, Do not omit to say (it). 

M-?| ov w. the infin., after expressions of inability and of fear, rendered 
negatively. 

10. Ov Svva/jLcu fir) ovk errratvelv <xe, I am not able not 
to praise you (i. e. I cannot but praise you). 

11. OvSeis olocrre aUw? Xeycov fir) ov Karaye\acrro<; 
elvcu, No one is able, speaking otherwise, not to be ridicu- 
lous (i. e. no one.... can avoid being ridiculous). 

12. AeBocKa fir) ov Oefitrbv 17, I fear that it may not be 
lawful. 



LESSON XXVI. 105 

Ov \l4\, w. the subjunc. or fut. indie. , an emphatic negative. 

13. Ov fir) irocrjaco, I certainly shall not do it. 
14 Ov fjLrjTTore egapvos yevcopcu, I certainly shall never 
deny (it). 

15. Ov fir) cr eyco Trepiotyoiiai, airekdovra, I certainly 
shall not look with indifference on your departure (on you 
having departed). 

16. Ov /at] (re ava>, ovh ov litj ere eyKaTaXeiira), I cer- 
tainly shall not leave thee nor forsake thee. 

17. AiK7]v ov&eh ovhejiiav fir) £&>, No one certainly shall 
suffer any punishment. 

N. B. The above oral exercise requires, and will repay, more than ordi- 
nary attention. 

* Not frequent. Oftenest found in the orators. 
To be Written. 

1. They never did this anywhere, nor was this language 
ever anywhere heard from any one of them. 2. If they 
had not done this anywhere, this language would not have 
been heard from anybody. 3. We did not say these things 
and fail to write a resolution, nor did we write a resolution 
and fail to go as envoys, nor did we go as envoys and fail 
to persuade the Thebans. 4. When they have said these 
things, and have gone as envoys, they certainly will not 
persuade the Thebans. 5. May we not on account of want 
fail to do these things. 6. In declaring that they did not 
on account of want fail to give, they spoke the truth. 7. 
They would not have failed to indict me directly, if they 
had supposed they would convict me. 8. No one shall 
ever say that anything, so far as depends on me, has been 
neglected ; nor that any one through me has suffered any 
punishment. 9. Nothing would prevent our dying insulted, 
if we should fall into the power of the king. 10. He fears 
that we may not fall into the power of the king and (may 
not) die insulted. 11. Are you not all ashamed not to 

5* 



106 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

unite in helping zealously ? 12. All things must be done 
that we may not fall into the power of the king. 13. No 
one shall ever say that we are ashamed to unite in helping 
zealously. 14. May they not fail to suffer punishment, if 
they act unjustly. 15. Do not have any fellowship, any- 
where, in any way, with any one of those who act un- 
justly. 



LESSON XXVII. 

SOME NEGATIVE PHRASES. 
References. 

Good., § 153, Note 4. Curt., §§ 602, 622. 

Had., 817, a, 848. Cr., 559, c, 713. 

Had. EL, 558, 578. Koch, §§ 78, 5, Rem. 1 ; 131, 44, 

Kuh., §§ 332, R. 12 ; 321, 3. R. 2. 

Examples. 

1. Et, yap ravra irpoelro aKovtrc, irept div ovBeva 
klvBvvov bvTiv ov% virefjieivav oi irpoyovoi, Tt? ovyi kcl- 
reiTTVcrev av crou ; firj yap T17? 7ro\ea)? ye, /jltjB €/jlou. For 
if (the city) had abandoned without a struggle those things 
for which our ancestors endured every danger, who would 
not have scorned — you ? For (let me) not (say) the city, 
nor myself. 

2. ATroWoSwpos Be teal ev tw e/jLirpoaOev XP 0V( P ov ^ ev 
eiravero Baxpvcov, /cal Br) kol Tore ava^pv^rjcrdfMevo^ icXaicov 
teal ayavafcrojv ovBeva ovriva ov KareKkaae rcov nrapov- 
tgov, ir\r]v ye avrov XwKpcnovs. But Apollodorus even in 
the preceding time did not cease to shed tears ; and then, 
at that time also, crying aloud, with weeping and violent 
expressions overcame every one of fhose present, except 
Socrates himself. 



LESSON XXVII. 107 

3. Tovto to eOos upas elBucev, a(j)o/3(D<; re teal fieyaXo- 
irpeTTOi^ airoKplveaOai, eav tis tl eprjrai, . . . . are /cat clvtos 
irape^cov avrov epwrdv twv ' EXXtJvcov to> fiovXojJLevw b ti 
av Tt? fiovXrjrai,, teat ovSevc otw ov k a7ro/cpLvo{ievo<;. He 
has accustomed you to this habit, to reply boldly and grandly, 
if any one ask any question, .... because he himself also sub- 
mits himself to any one of the Greeks who wishes, to ask 
whatever any one wishes, and replies to everybody. 

4. Ovtc r\v Tore TavTa, aXX eizi Trjs aXr]deca<;, iyyvs tcov 
epycov, ere ixefjLvqixevwv vficov kcli fxovov ov k ev Tat? ^epalv 
etcacrTa e^ovToyv, iravres eycyvovT av oi Xoyoi. These things 
were not possible at that time ; but the statements would 
all have been made in the face of the truth, when the events 
were near, while you still remembered (them) and had 
(them) severally all but in your hands. 

5. Ov /jlovov virep tyj<; avrcov irarpcSo^, aXXa real 
Trdo~r)S 'EXXaSos .... tfOeXov diroOv^aKeiv. They were will- 
ing to die, not only for their own fatherland, but also (for) 
all Hellas. 

. Kac ov% oti o Kpircov ev rjav^ca rjv, aXXa tcau oi 
6i\oL avrov. And not only Crito was quiet, but also his 
friends (were quiet). 

7. Olfiac av /jutj ore lSlcottjv rcva, aXXa tov fieyav 
/3ao~iXea evapc6[jLr)Tovs av evpelv avrov ravras (sc. rds 
rjfjiepas real Ta? vvfera^. I think that not only any private 
man, but the great king himself would find these (days and 
nights) easily counted. 

U t7T7ro? TTLTrrec ft? yovara feat paKpov tcaiceivov e£e- 
Tpa^Xco-ev ' ov /jltjv aXX eirefjietvev 6 Kvpos fioXis 7nw?, 
tcai 6 Irnro^ egaveo-TTj. The horse falls upon his knees and 
almost cast even him (Cyrus) over his head ; nevertheless, 
Cyrus remained upon (him) in some way with difficulty, 
and the horse recovered (himself). 

For the use of el Be p,r], see Ln. XXIV., Ex. 4. 



108 



EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 



Vocabulary. 



Endure, v7ropeva>, w. 

Every, every one, oudeis oaris 

ov 
To fall into the power of, ylyvo- 

fj.ai «rl w. dat. 
Philip, <&i\i7rnos, ov, 6. 
To cry aloud, dvafipvxaopat,, atpci. 
To overcome, break down, 

KaTCLKkdco, dam. 
Except, 7t\t]v, more emphat. 7r\r)v 

ye. 
To cease, 7ravop.ai. 
To shed tears, to weep, 8aKpva>. 
To accustom, edlfa, -Laco or -iu>. 
Habit, ZOos, ovs, to. 
To reply, diroicpivopai. 
Boldly, d(p6fi(0s. 
Grandly, peya\o7rpe7r<os. 
To submit one's self, napexco w. 

reflex, pron. 
An event, a deed, epyov, ov, to. 
Near, iyyvs. 
To remember, pepvrjpai. 



All but, povov ov. 

Hand, x e ' l P-> X el P° y ? V m 

Not only... but also, ov povov... 

dXXd kolL. 
In behalf of, vnep w. gen. 
To be willing, ede\a>. 
A private man, 18ig>ttjs, ov, 6. 
Easily counted, evapidprjTos, ov. 
Horse, tmros, ov, 6. 
Horsemen, 'nnrevs, eats, 6. 

Fall, 7U7JTG). 

Knee, yow, citos, to. 

To cast over the head, eKTpaxrj- 

At£o), -iaat, or -ia>. 
Nevertheless, ov prjv dXXd. 
To remain on, empevco, g>. 
"With difficulty, p6\is, adv. 
In some way, ircos (e?7clit). 
Arms, armor, 07rAa, a>v, ra. 
To hold, ex<>>. 
"Water, vdcop, aros, to. 
To carry away, snatch away, 

apnd^co, -era). 



Oral Exercise. 

1. OvSevo? orov ov irav7(DV av v/jlcov kclv rfkuciav 
Trarrjp eorjv, I might be, so far as age is concerned, a father 
of every one of yon all. 

2. OvSevl or<p ovk aTrofcplverai, He replies to every 
one. 

3. OvBeva e<pacrav ovtiv* ov Barcpvovr cnroo-TpefyeaOaLy 
They affirmed that every one turned away in tears. 

4. Ov \oj(p /JLovov KoiKvetv aX,A,' epy<p nai tyrjcpio-fiaTL, 
To hinder not by word only, but by deed and decree. 

5. Ou^ otl 6 KpLTcov....aWa /cal ol (j>t\oi, civtov, 
Not only Crito, but also his friends. 



LESSON XXVII. 109 

6. Mrj on #eo?, aXXa teal avOpoairoi ov <j>ikov<ri tou<? 
amiaiovvTa^ Don't suppose that only God, but men also, 
do not love the faithless. 

7. Oi>x 07TW? ra <rK€V7]....d\\a tcai at 0vpai,Not 
only the furniture .... but also the doors. 

8. OvK 7T&I9 TCOV iaVTOV Tl €7r€$Q)K6V, dXX (l Kdl TOiV 

v/juerepcDv iroXXa v^rjp^rat,, He has not only not given any 
of his own possessions, but has even taken away many of 
yours. (Note this usage : not only not.... but even.) 

9. Ou% 07T&)? X (l P lv a ^ ro ^ ^% et? ? aXXa fiiaOcoaas 
cravrov Kara tovtwvi iroXirevei, You not only have no 
gratitude towards them, but, having sold yourself, you act 
against these (citizens). 

10. Ov jjlovov. ...ovSe. . . .ovSe ....a XXa kcli, Not 
only.... not only.... not only.... but also. (Dem., De Cor., 
93.) * 

11. Movov ovk eiri Tat? KefyaXais Trepufcepovaiv, All 
but on their heads they carry (them) about. 

12. "Ocrov ov iraprjv, He was all but present (i. e. had 
almost arrived). 

13. OvKert, no longer, ovttg), not yet, ovir g>?, in no 
manner. 

14. Xv ye ov&€ opwv ytyvcDartceis ovSe clkovcqv fie/ivr}- 
aac, You, at least, not even seeing, know; nor hearing, 
remember. 

15. Ovk ev t<m vScltc ra oirXa r]v e%€iv, ei Se /jut], r^pira- 
%ev 6 7roTayLto?, It was not possible (for them) to hold their 
arms in the water ; but if they did, the river carried them 
away. 

To be Written. 

1. Our ancestors endured every danger that they might 
never fall into the power of Philip. 2. Every one of those 
present, crying aloud and weeping, was overcome, except 
Socrates himself. 3. If Apollodorus had not ceased shed- 
ding tears, he would have overcome every one of those 



HO EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

present. 4. He wishes to accustom every one of you to 
this habit, to reply boldly and grandly, if any one ask 
any question. 5. He will reply boldly and grandly to 
every one of you, if you ask him any question. 6. He 
submits himself to every one of the Greeks to ask whatever 
any one wishes, and replies to every one boldly and grandly. 
7. The events at that time were near, you still remembered 
(them), and had them all but in your hands. 8. If they 
had not been willing to die, not only in behalf of their own 
fatherland, but also (for) all Hellas, every one of us would 
have incurred the danger of falling into the power of 
Philip. 9. Not only Crito was willing to die in behalf of 
Socrates, but also his friends (were willing, etc.). 10. I 
think that not only Crito would be willing to die in behalf 
of Socrates, but also his friends (would be willing). 11. 
Not only any private man, but the great king himself will 
find these days and nights easily counted. 12. The horses, 
falling upon their knees, almost cast the horsemen over 
their heads ; nevertheless, they remained upon (the horses) 
in some way with difficulty. 13. Don't hold your arms 
in the water, if you do the river will carry them away. 

14. The river almost carried their arms away ; nevertheless, 
they held them in the water in some way with difficulty. 

15. The river not only carried away their arms, but also 
every one of the soldiers themselves. 






LESSON XX VIII. Ill 

LESSON XXVUI. 

PRINCIPAL USES OF »s, «<nrep, wore. 
Examples. 

1. To jnev ydp 7repas y o> ? av 6 Salficov /3ovXrj6ft, irdvToov 
yiyveTai • r] Be nrpoaLpeon^ avrr) rr)v tov o-vfiftovXov cW- 
voiav Br t Xol. fir] Br) tovto go? aBUr/fxa e/nov drjs, el Kparrj- 
<rai avveflr) ^CXlttttcp ry /jlu^tj. For the end of all things 
comes about, as the deity has willed ; but the plan itself 
makes plain the mind of the counsellor. Do not, then, set 
this down as an injustice of mine, if it happened to Philip 
to conquer in battle (&>? comparative). 

2. AXX go ? ov % airavra baa evrjv /car dvOpwirivov 

Xoyca/JLOV eiXo/irjv^ rj &> ? ov tcaXa teal rr)<; iroXeco? a%ia 

Trpayfiara evearrjaa/xrjv icai avayicala^ ravrd fiou Bel^ov, 
real tot rjBr) KaTrjyopei, /jlov. But that I did not choose all 
things which it was possible (to choose) according to human 
calculation, .... or, that I did not set on foot measures that 
were honorable, and worthy of the city, and necessary, show 
these things to me, and then at once accuse me (go? declara- 
tive). 

3. 2v/n/3ovXev(0 eyco tov avBpa tovtov efcrroBcov TTOielaQav 
co? Td^io-Ta^ go? fjLrjfceTc her) tovtov <j)vXaTT€o~6ai. /advise 
that this man be put out of the way as soon as possible, in 
order that it may no longer be necessary to guard ourselves 
against him. (The first co? comparative, the second final.) 

4. Kac eirc tt\v yecf>vpav tov Tcypr/Tos nroTapbov TrefiyjraL 
fceXevovat (pvXaKrjv^ go 9 BiavoelTai avTr)v Xvcrai, TiGaatyep- 
vrjs T17? vvktos, edv Bvvrjiai, go? /jut) BtafirjTe. And they 
bid (you) send a guard upon the bridge of the river Tigris, 
since Tissaphernes intends to destroy it in the night, if he 
can, so that you may not cross over. (The first go? causal, 
the second final.) 






112 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

5. V2<? Be iropevofxevoav ege/ci/fiawe rt T77? (f>a\ayyo$, to 
briXenropwov rjp^aro Bpofitp 6elv. And when, as they 
were marching, a part of the line bent outward, that which 
was left began to run hastily (a>? temporal). 

6. Kal evervyxavov rdcppow kcli avXcoaiv uScxto? irX^pe- 
aw, &>? firj hvvaadaL hiafialveiv avev yefyvpwv. And they 
fell in with ditches and canals full of water, so that they 
were not able to cross over without bridges (©? w. infin. 
denoting purpose or result ; i. e. <w? consecutive). 

7. ( 'f2<T7T€p aVTOV OVK CLV d^LU)(TaiT6 KCUCWS CLKOVeiV V7TO 
TCOV V{l€T€p(DV 7TCll8cOV, OVTO) fA7)$6 TOVT(p e7riTp€7T€Te 1T6pL 

tov irarpos /3\aa(f>TiiJLeLV. Just as you yourselves would 
not think it proper to listen to evil remarks from your own 
children, so do not permit this man to speak ill of his father 
(wo-7rep, intens. form of to? comparative). 

8. To Oelov roiouTov kclI toctovtov eo-riv, wad afia 
iravra opav kcli irdvr aicoveiv kcli Travraypv irapelvai. 
The divine (being) is of such a character and so great, that 
he at once sees all things and hears all things and is every- 
where present, (ware is followed either by the infinitive 
or by the indicative. With the infin. it usually, but not 
always,' takes the negative ^77; w. the indie, usually, not 
always, ov. The difference in meaning between the two 
negatives, also between the indie, and infin., is generally 
perceptible.) 

Vocabulary. 

End, termination, nepas, error, to. Mind, thought, Sidvoia, as, f). 

To come about, to become, Counsellor, crvp/3ovXos, ov, 6. 

yiyvofxai. To happen to a person, o-vfi- 

The deity, 6 cW/xwi/, ovo?. $aLva> to. dat. 

The divine (being), to 6elov, ov. To set on foot, ivio-njui. 

To will, to wish, /3ouXopcu. A measure, deed, transaction, 

Plan, scope, aim, purpose, 7rpayp.a, cltos, to. 

7rpouipecns, ecos, 17. Honorable, koXos, 77, oV. 



LESSON XXVIII. 



113 



To choose, alpeopai, -ovpai. 
Human, dudpcontvos, 77, ov. 
Calculation, Xoytapos, ov, 6. 
To advise, o-vp.[3ov\evco, -aco. 
To put out of the way, eWoSwi/ 

TToieicrOai (mid. or pass.) 
It is necessary, bet. 
To intend, diavoeopai, ovpai. 
To destroy, break down, Xvoo. 
The line (of battle), cpakayg, 

yos, rj. 
To begin, ap-^opai. 
To bend outward, etcKvpxiivoo, 

-avco (e*c, Kvpa, a wave). 
The part left, to €7ri\ei7r6p.evov. 
To run hastily (lit. to run with 

a running), dpopoo delv. 
A canal, av\a>v, a>vos, 6. 
Full of, 7r\r)pr]s : es, w. gen. 
On foot, neCjj. 
To construct, £eiryi/i;/zi, -|o>. 
Just as, coanep. 
To think proper, a£tdco, co, 



To listen to evil remarks, <a- 

KCOS O.K0VC0. 

From (denoting the agent or doer), 

xjtto w. gen. 
Child, 7ia7s, naidos, 6, or 17. 
To permit, eVtrpeVa), -yj/co. 
To speak ill, (3\ao~(pT]p.eco, co,-t)0 , g>. 
There are those -who, some 

persons, Zanv ot ; oftener in the 

nom. elo*\v 01; but in the gen. 

eariv <ov, of some ; dat. ecrnv 

ols, to some ; ace. io-rlv ovsi 

some, as obj. ace. 
To deny, ov cpnpi. 
At once, at the same time, apa. 
Ut, relat., cos; ut, final, cos. 
Vinum, olvos, ov, 6. 
-33tas, rjXiicia, as) fj. 
Vetustas, 7raKaioTr]s, tjtos, rj. 
Coacesco, o£vs yi.yvop.ai. 
Edo (in fin. esse or edere), eadlco. 
Oportet, Set, or xph- 
Vivo, vivere, {dco, f. usu. fticotro- 

pai, aor. efilcov. 



Oral Exercise. 

1. &>9 relative (or comparative). 

&>? @ov\et, as you wish ; oj? <£/\o?, as a friend ; w? efiol 
Bokel, or simply oj? e/zoi, as it seems to me ; w? ifiy So^rj, 
in my opinion ; &>? yepovrc, in the judgment of an old man; 
m Ihovri, in the judgment of one looking on; «? irXrfiei, 
in the judgment of the multitude; <u? ye k^aifyvr)*; d/cov- 
aavTi^ at least in the judgment of one who suddenly hears ; 
«? Tayiora, most quickly, as quickly as possible; &>? liii 
to 7roA,u, and a stronger expression, w? eVt to irXelarov, 
for the most part; to? d\r)6ax; 7 very truly; &>? erepcos, far 
otherwise. 



114: EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

2. a>5 temporal. 

co? ?5 TpoTTi) eyevero, when the rout commenced ; a>? 
Tayicna eco? virecfccuvev, as soon as dawn appeared. 

3. co? causal. 

co? havoeiraL, since (because) he purposes. 

4. w? final. 

«? /a?) hiafSrjre, that you may not cross over. 

5. co? declarative. 

ovTrore epel ovSeis &><? eyco TrpoeScotca uyita?, never shall 
any one say that I betrayed you. 

6. coq with the infinitive. 

co? e£7reti/, or oftener co? erro? et7reu>, to speak frankly, 
to use this somewhat strong expression; co? o-vvto/agos 
enrelv, co? kv ftpayei elirelv^ co? avveXdvn enrelv, to speak 
concisely, to speak briefly ; co? ye fioc Sokem, as it seems to 
me. 

7. co? with a participle. 

co? avrbv anroKTevwv, as if to put him to death ; &>? 
ovtcos e-xpvTaiV) as though things were so. 

8. co? before a preposition. 

co? cttl ITtcr/Sa?, as if against Pisidians ; co^ eiii vavfia- 
%/ay, as if for a naval battle ; as Trap e/jlov^ as if from me ; 
so too co? 7rpo?, co? et?, co? cutto, etc. 

9. co? as a preposition, chiefly w. the names of persons, 
= 7rpo?. 

co? /SacrtXea, to the king. 

10. co? in exclamations. 

cos a drtfjid^eL TTciTT}p, how your father dishonors you ! 
co? darelos 6 avOpwiro?, what a nice man! (lit. how nice the 
man !) co? virepheboucd gov, how I fear for you ! 

11. co? with numerals. 

co? %i<jyL\ioiy about two thousand ; co? irevre fiaXiara, 
about five at most. 



LESSON XXVIII. 115 

12. w? in some elliptical phrases. 

Co? e/cao-To?, e/cacTToi, each separately ; 005 t/ ? as if what ? 
i. e. to what end ? 

13. ftj? with the infinitive, in the sense of ware, denot- 
ing purpose or result. 

to? fir) SvvaaOcu, so that (they) were not able; &)? fir) 
cLTrreadai Tr}? fcdpcj)r)<; to vSotp, so that the water might not 
touch the hay. 

To be Written. 

1. He said that the end of all things came about as the 
deity has willed, but that the plan itself made plain the 
mind of the counsellor. 2. If it should happen to Philip 
to conquer in battle and you should set this down as an 
injustice of mine, you would yourself act unjustly. 3. Do 
not accuse us, unless you are able to show that we did not 
set on foot measures that were honorable, and worthy of 
the city, and necessary. 4. That we do not choose all 
things which it is possible (to choose) according to human 
calculation, these things you will never be able to show. 

5. He said he should advise that this man be put out of 
the way as soon as possible, in order that it might no 
longer be necessary for us to guard ourselves against him. 

6. They said that he intended to destroy the bridge by 
night, if he could, in order that we might not cross over. 

7. Since they intend to destroy the bridge by night, if they 
can, in order that we may not cross over, we will send a 
guard upon it. 8. And when a part of the line began to 
bend outward, as they were marching, that part which was 
left ran hastily. 9. If they fall in with canals full of 
water, so that they cannot cross over on foot, they will 
construct bridges, in order that they may be able (to cross 
over). 10. Just as you yourselves do not think it proper 
to listen to evil remarks from your own children, so 
you did not permit this man to speak ill of his father. 



HO EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

11. There are those who deny that the divine (being) is of 
such a character and so great that he at once sees all things 
and hears all things and is everywhere present. 12. Do 
not permit this man to speak ill of the divine (being), if 
you suppose he is of such a character and so great that he at 
once sees all things and hears all things and is everywhere 
present. 13. Socrates said the divine (being) was of such 
a character and so great as at once to see all things and 
hear all things and to be everywhere present. 14. Ut 
non omne vinum, sic non omnis setas vetustate coacescit. 
15. Esse oportet ut vivas, non vivere ut edas. 



LESSON XXIX. 

THE PRINCIPAL ILLATIVE CONJUNCTIONS. 

Examples. 

1. ' Ap ovv ovB eXeyev, coo-ire p ovt) eypacfzev^ r)vt,fca 
epydaaaOai ti Beoc kclkov ; ov fiev ovv r)v eiirelv erepco. 
Did he, then, fail to speak (just as he did fail to write a 
resolution), at a time when it was needful to do some mis- 
chief ? It was not possible, indeed, for another to speak 
(i. e. iEschines occupied all the time). (The first ovv illa- 
tive, the second confirmative.) 

2. Ta fiev ovv KaTrjyoprj/neva nroWa kcu heivd, kcu irepl 
cbv evtcov /jL€ya\a$ /cai ra$ ecr^dra^ oi vofxoi StSoaat tl/xco- 
/o/a?. Now surely those things alleged (against me) are 
many and serious ; and for some of them the laws pre- 
scribe great, even the extreme, penalties (ovv continuative). 

3. Ovkow av €/c(j)vyoi ye ttjv ireirpcotMewqv. He surely 
could not escape that which is fated. 

4. Ov/covv p<eyj)i tcov %povcov eKetvcov, ev ot? tclvt 
eirpayQr)^ iravra<; avcopLoXoyrjjxai rof? %povov<; ra apiara 



LESSON XXIX. 117 

irpdrreiv rrj iroXei. "Wherefore, up to those times in which 
these things were done, during all the time (lit. all the 
times) I am acknowledged to have done what w T as best for 
the city (lit. I have been acknowledged to be doing, etc.). 

5. El to'lvvv Tt? epoiro ovrivovv tici ra irXeicrra 
$i\i7T7ro<; wv Kareirpa^e BiqyKrjaaro, Travres av eiiroiev tg) 
arparoireBw Kai tg3 BiBovai tcai Biacfrdeipeiv rovs eiri iwv 
7rpay/j,aTcov. ovkovv twv /jl€v Bwdfjiecov ovre /cvpios ovd 
rjje/jicov r\v eyco, ware ovB 6 Xoyos twv kclto. ravra 
TrpayOkviwv 7rpo? €fj,L If, therefore, any one should ask 
any man whatsoever by what means Philip achieved the 
most of his successes (lit. accomplished the most of those 
things in which he succeeded), all would say, by his army 
and by bribing and corrupting those at the head of affairs. 
Now I was not master nor leader of the military forces ; 
wherefore the account respecting those things accomplished 
by these means is not (to be presented) to me. 

6. Aidirep paov eari koi da(j>aXearepov ael Tot? eyOpols 
virrjpeTOvvTci fiiaOapvelv r) rrju virep vjulwp eXofxevov rd^iv 
iroXireveadai. Wherefore, it is always easier and safer to 
receive pay in the service of our enemies than to discharge 
the duties of a citizen, having chosen one's position in your 
defence. 

7. AXX apa, d) MeXrjre 7 finr) ol ev tt) eKrcXrjcria, ol 
€K/c\r)(Tia<TTai, Bia<f)6eipovai tou? vecoTepov? ; rj Kcucelvoi 
fieXnov? iroiovariv airavjes ; Ka/celvoi. Havre? apa, cos 
eoiicev, Adrjvaioi koXovs icdyaOovs iroiovai ttXtjv e/iov, eyto 
Be /jlovos BiacpOeipw. But then, Meletus, those who are in 
the assembly, the ecclesiasts, do not corrupt the younger 
(citizens), do they ? Do they also all make them better ? 
They also (make them better). Accordingly, all the Athe- 
nians, as it seems, make them honorable and good except 
me, but I alone corrupt them. 



US 



EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 



Vocabulary, 

When, at the exact time when, 

■qviKa. 
Therefore, ovv (postpos.). 
Indeed, pev ovv (postpos); pev 

before ovv = prjv. 
To do, perform, perpetrate, ep- 

yd^opai. 
Mischief, harm, evil, kclkov, ov, to. 
To speak, Xeya). Often in the aor. 

eiTTOV. 

Now, as continuative particle, ovv. 



To receive pay, pLcrdapveco, <3, 
■fjcreo. 

In the service of, serving, par- 
ticip. of (nrnpeTeco, a>. 

An enemy, e^dpos, ov, 6 ; an en- 
emy (in war), noXepios, ov, 6. 

Easy, paSios, a, ov; comp. paw, 
sup. pacrros. 

Safe, dcrqbaXrjs, es; comp. -earepos ; 
sup. -ecrraTOf. 

A position, reikis, ea>s, f). 



Prescribe, give (in speaking of It seems, eoiKe(v), per/, as pres. ; 



law and penalty), biboapi. 
Extreme, eax^Tos, V' ov - 
Penalty, punishment, npwpia, 

as, r). 
To allege (something against 

a person), Karnyopeco, g>. 
Even if, ko.1 el. 
Fated, Tvenpwpevos, n, ov. The 

verb is defective 8f in most forms 

only Epic. 
To acknowledge, dvopoXoyeco, <5, 

-T) (TO). 

To achieve, to organize, 8ioiKeo>, 
to, -r)0~(t) (bid, olneoi). 

Successes, things in which 
one succeeds, a Kara7rparr6trts'. 

To corrupt, diacpdelpco. 

At the head of, eiri w. gen. 

Affairs, it pay para, rd. 

To bribe, dibcopi, in some connec- 
tions. 



pluperf ecpKeiv as imperf 
Better, fteXricov, ov, comp. of dya- 

66s- 
Except, nXrjv w. gen. 
Socrates, SooKparns, ovs, 6. 

Note. In selecting the proper 
illative conjune. for the English 
wherefore, therefore, accordingly, etc., 
study carefully the examples. 

Satisfacio, dpeaKco w. dat. 

Sed, aXXa. 

Quot...tot, oaoi, at, a,...Toaovroi, 

Tocravrai, roaavra. 
Homo, avOpcairos. 
Sententia, yvwpn. ns, fj. 
Pallor, f^aTrardopai, copxii ; falli, 

e^airaTnOrjvai. 
Possum, bvvapai. 
Servus, 8ovXos, ov, 6. 
Sepelio, OdnTco. 



LESSON XXIX. 119 

Oral Exercise. 

Principal uses of o-Sv. 

1. Confirmative ; in the phrases, rrdvv fiev ovv, ov fiev 
ovv, aXX' ovv, yap ovv, 8 ovv, and in some combinations 
alter other particles. 

Ael yap ovv, for it is certainly necessary; kuI yap ovv 
nrpeirei, for it is certainly becoming ; fieXXco yap ovv arret, 
vijllv epelv Kal aXXa, ecj) oh Icrcj^ $or\GeoQai, for I am cer- 
tainly about to say to yon some other things also, at which 
yon will perhaps cry out ; irdvra fxev ovv nroielv kiriaravrai, 
they know how to do all things certainly; ry 8 ovv ar pared 
Tore drreScofce Kupo? fiiadov rerrdpoav /jltjvcov, but certain 
(it is that) Cyrus then gave to the army pay in full for four 
months. 

2. Illative, the most frequent use. 

Tavrrjs ovv eve/ca tt}? irapohov Kvpos ras vavs fiere- 
Tre'fiyjraTo, wherefore, on account of this pass, Cyrus sent 
for the ships ; * teal yap ovv eTrlarevov avrw al iroXeis, 
accordingly, the cities trusted him. 
• 3. Continuative. 

Kvpos fiev ovv ovroos ereXevrrjaev, now Cyrus thus 
died; KXeap^os puev ovv roaavra elirev, now Clearchus 
spoke such things; ei ovv /xe, orrep elirov, erri rovroi? 
dfyloire, if now, as I was saying, you should acquit me on 
these conditions. 

Note. It is sometimes difficult to decide whether it is preferable to 
regard odv as intensive, illative, or continuative. Cf. nal yap ofrv, 1 & 2. 

4. With relatives, to strengthen and generalize the idea. 
El roivvv rt? epoiro bvrivovv, if, therefore, one should 

ask any man whatsoever (quemcunque) ; 07r<w? ovv, or oircoa- 
ovv, or brrwanovv, in any manner whatever. 

5. Ov/covv. 

Ov/covv 8c$do~K(Ofi€v aviov, aXXa jjlj] XoiSopcofiev, where- 
fore, let us teach him, but not reproach (him). 



120 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

6. Ovkovv, 

Ovkovv eirel^r) Sea/ma ra>$€ irepifiakuv ; will you not 
hasten to cast bands around this one ? ovkovv epels ttot, 
elr airaXkaxOeh airet; will you not at length speak, 
then, being dismissed, go away ? 

Uses of dpa. 

1. Confirmative. 

Kal eIkotws a pa (r<z lepa) ov/c eytyvero, and with 
reason certainly (the sacrifices) did not become (favorable). 

2. Illative. 

Havre? apa 'AOrjvacoL koXovs /caya&ovs ttolovgi ttXtjv 
efiov, accordingly, all Athenians, except me, make them 
honorable and good. 

3. El apa, rjv apa, if perchance. 

Uses of vvv, a weakened form of vvv. 

1. Time, now. 2. Illative and continuative, then, there- 
upon, therefore. 3. Intensive, <j>ep6 vvv, come now ; t/? 
vvv, who now 1 Frequent in Homer. The strengthened 
form Tolvvv, post-Homeric, is very frequent in later writers. 

roiyap, roiydproc, roiyapovv, and coo~t€ are also used as 
illative conjunctions. 

* When the particles Kal yap odv begin a sentence, each particle retains 
its proper force (and, for, therefore), and the sentence thus introduced sus- 
tains to the preceding a copulative, causal, and illative relation, all at 
once. We cannot easily render them all into English, and hence only- 
render that one the meaning of which seems to us most important in the 
connection. The same principle will apply to roiyapovv, roiyap, roiydproi, 
/cat yap, etc. 

To be "Written. 

1. When therefore, it is necessary to do some mischief 
(by speaking), it is not possible indeed for another to 
speak. 2. If, therefore, it is necessary to do some mis- 
chief (by speaking), it will not be possible indeed for 
another to speak. 3. Now the laws prescribed great, even 



LESSON XXIX. 121 

the extreme penalties for many of those things alleged. 
4 Now, even if the laws had prescribed great, even the 
extreme penalties, he would have spoken when it was 
necessary to do some mischief (by speaking). 5. He surely 
will not escape the penalties that are fated, if he does any 
mischief. 6. Wherefore, up to those times, it was ac- 
knowledged that all things which were best for the city 
had been done. 7. If, therefore, you should ask any man 
whatsoever, by what (means) they achieved the most of 
their successes, he would say by corrupting those at the 
head of affairs. 8. If, therefore, we had asked any man 
whatsoever by what means the enemy achieved the most 
of their successes, all would have said, by bribing and cor- 
rupting those at the head of affairs. 9. Wherefore, he 
always received pay in the service of our enemies, suppos- 
ing it was easier and safer than to choose his position in 
your defence. 10. Wherefore, do not suppose it is easier 
and safer to receive pay in the service of our enemies, than 
to choose your position in behalf of the city. 11. Where- 
fore, do not choose your position in behalf of our enemies, 
since it is (gen. abs.) easier and safer to serve the city. 

12. Accordingly, all the Athenians, as it seemed, made the 
youth better, except Socrates, but he alone corrupted them. 

13. Accordingly, you would not be able to persuade any 
man whatsoever that we corrupted the youth. 14. Mihi 
non satisfacit. Sed quot homines tot sententise ; falli igi- 
tur possumus. 15. Itaque a servis sepultus est. 



122 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

LESSON XXX. 

THE PRINCIPAL INTENSIVE PARTICLES. 

8tj, 8fj0€v, Srjirov, Stjto,, ys, -yovv, ire'p, [rrjv. 

Examples. 

1. 'O o° ovv Tio-<Ta(f)epv7)<; a>? fAeiov e^cov a7rrjXXdyr}, 
ttoXlv fiev ovtc avaarpecpeCy et? oe to arparoirecov acpiKo- 
/jl€vos to twv 'EXXtjvoov eicel crvvTvyydvei* ftacnXei, kcll 
6/jlov Srji iraXiv o-vvTaj~d/j,evoi, ewopevovro. And now Tis- 
saphernes, when being worsted he withdrew, did not again 
turn back, but on arriving in the camp of the Greeks there 
fell in with the king, and now again drawing up their lines 
together they proceeded in company (Brj denoting time). 

2. Ol T(ov {3ao~L\e(Dv oivoyooi, eirethav BiScoat tt\v (f)id- 

11 3 3 y ~ „ , n 3 n • 3 v 

Xrjv, apvaavTes air auTrjs tco Kvaocp ez? tt\v apcarepav 
y/ipci €y%edfjL€V0L KaTappocfaovcn, rod Br), ec (pap/xaKa 
ey%eoiev, firj Xvairekelv avroU. The cupbearers of the 
kings, when they offer the bowl, drawing from it with the 
cyathus, pouring it into the left hand, swallow down (what 
they have thus drawn out), in order no doubt that it might 
not profit them, if they should pour in poison (into the 
bowl). (Brj used to call attention to a particular statement 
and emphasize it.) 

3. Tovro S77 to ayos ol AafceSai/JLOvioL eXavveiv etceXevov 
8r)0ev tols deols irpcoTov Tt/jLcopovvTes, el$0T€<; Se Uepuckea 
top ^avOiTTirov Trpoae^ofievov avT<p KaTci Tiqv firjrepa ktc. 
This pollution, I say, the Lacedsemonians exhorted (them) 
to drive out, primarily, forsooth, avenging the gods, but 
knowing that Pericles, the son of Xanthippus, was impli- 
cated in it on the mother's side, etc. (8j resumptive, taking 
up a statement after a digression.) 

4. EXeyov Ttz/e? otl rcaTiSoiev aTpaTevfia' eSo/cei Br) 
Tot? aTpciTrjyols ov/c dcrcfraXes elvai htaaKrjvovv. Some said 



LESSON XXX. 123 

that they descried an army ; accordingly it seemed to the 
generals to be unsafe to encamp apart. (Brj illative.) 

5. Kcil ydp ovv% TrXelarot Sr) avrcp evi ye avhpt, tcov 
ecj) i)fJLO)V e7T€0u/jL7}aav kcll ^prifjuaja tcai 7roA.et? /ecu ra eav- 
to)v aco/xara TrpoeaOac Accordingly,, very many persons* 
desired to commit to him more than to any other one man 
of those in our time both treasures and cities and their own 
bodies (lit. to him, one man at least, of those in our time). 
(Srj emphasizes the superlative ; ye restricts the statement 
to evi dvhpl and emphasizes these words.) 

6. 'fl 'XwKpares, iyw (lev w\xr\v tou? (f>c\oao(f>ovvTa^ 
euhaifioveaTepovs ^prjvac yiyveaOcu^ av Be fjuoi $ok€ls ra- 
vavTLa rrjs (fuXoaocfrcas aTToKeXavKevai' £77? yovv outgo?, 
co? ovB av eh BovXos vtto Beairdrr] Stan cofievos fxeiveiev. 
O Socrates ! I supposed that those pursuing philosophy 
ought to become more fortunate ; but you seem to me to 
have acquired from philosophy the opposite (of prosperity) ; 
at least, you live in such a way as not even a slave subsist- 
ing under a master would stay (with him). 

7. AXXa /jLT)v el tw yen avrw Trpocrrd^avrt (ca\a)$ 
VTrrjperrjaeLev, ovbevl irwirore ayaptaiov eiaoe rr)v irpodv- 
fiiav. roiyapovv KpariGTOL &rj virrfperaL iravTO<$ epyov 
Kvpw eXexO-qaav yevecdai. But further, if any one served 
him well in any appointed task (lit. served him well, hav- 
ing appointed or enjoined anything), he never left the devo- 
tion of any one unrewarded. Accordingly, Cyrus was said 
to have for every enterprise the very best coadjutors (lit. 
there were said to arise to Cyrus, etc.). (tir\v introduces a 
new and emphatic statement ; ye imparts emphasis to rh 
and is best rendered by emphasizing the Eng. any one ; hr) 
often emphasizes a single word, as here /cpdncrToi.} 

* ava<rTp€<j>et. and <rvvTvyxdvei. are historic present, and are better ren- 
dered here by the past. 

t Acqording to Curtius (Grundziige, p. 560,, Sr), Lat. jam, German ja, 
Eng. yea, yes, are from the same original stem : 8-q sustains to t}5t) the same 
relation as /j.tjv to 7) fir)i>. 

X See note, Ln. XXIX., Oral Exercise, p. 120. 






124 



EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 



Vocabulary. 



To be -worsted, pciov e'xeiv. 
To -withdraw, dnaXXdTop,ai. 
Now again, drj (postpos.) ndXiv. 
To fall in -with, o~vvrvyxdv(o w. 

dat. 
In company, together, 6p.ov. 
Cupbearer, oiVo^oos, ov, 6. 
To draw, dpvco & dpiiTco (f dpvo-a>, 

doubtful), aor. fjpv<ra, (pf fjpv- 

kcl, doubtful). 
A bowl, drinking-bowl, (pidXn, 

ijs, 77. 
Cyathus, nvaOos, ov, 6, a cup for 

dipping or drawing from the <pa- 

Ttjp (mixer), or from the drink- 
ing-bowl. 
To pour in, eyxea>,f like the pres., 

also eyx^a, aor. eW^ea ; mid. ive- 

X^ap-nv. 
Left, as op. to right, dpiarepos, a, 6v. 
To swallow down, Karappocpea), 

a>, -770-0). 
In order that, tov w. infin. 
No doubt, br}. 

To profit, XvaiTeXeco, <5, -rjcrco. 
Poison, (pdppaKov, ov, to ; often 

plur. (pdppaKa, drugs. 
Pollution, ayoy, ovs, to. 
I say, 877 (resumptive). 
To drive out, eXavvco. 
To avenge, Tiptopico, <5, -fjcra). 
Primarily, 7rpa>Tov. 



Forsooth, hrjQev. 

Pericles, IlepiKXrjs, eovs, 6. 

To be involved in, 7rpoa-exofxai 
w. dat. 

On the side of, Kara w. ace. 

To commit, irpolnpi. 

Accordingly, used in this lesson 
to render 8rj, #* also kcu yap ovv ; 
in a former lesson apa. 

Those in our time, our con- 
temporaries, ol ecf) rjp.a>v. 

Treasures, xpVH- aTa ^ o-roav, to. 

Body, o~a>pa, cltos, to. 

Those who are pursuing phi- 
losophy, Ol (pl\oO~OCpOVVT€S. 

Ought, xphi i n that form which the 

construction requires. 
Fortunate, evdaip.a>v, ov] comp. 

-eo-Tepos, sup. -eo~TaTos. 
In such a "way that, ovtcos as. 
But further, dXXd prjv. 
To leave, allow, suffer, edco, ecu, 

-do~(o. 
Devotion, readiness to serve 

a person, irpoOvpia, as, 77. 
Unrewarded, dxdpio-Tos, ov. 
Sed nimirum, oA\' ovv, dXXa Bfj, 

dXXd 8rJTa. 
Major, /xe/£o>i>, ov. 
Quidam, tis ye. 
Quam, 77. 
Opinor, 010/xat. 



LESSON XXX. 125 

Oral Exercise. 

1. Uses of Br]. 

(1.) Time, nearly = t/Stj. 

'O 7rarr)p kclL rj fJ>rjTr)p iraXai Br) erereXevT^Keaav, his 
father and mother were already long ago dead; ra vvv Brj 
yeyev7]/j.eva, those things which have just now (now already) 
taken place ; eVet kcll evravO' eywpovv ol EXXrjves, Xei- 
ttovo-l Br) rov Xo<j>ov ol lirireU, when the Greeks were pro- 
ceeding there also, the horsemen at once leave the hill; 
Xeye Br], speak now; aye Br) elire, come now, speak; e^e 
Br], hold now ! wait now ! 

(2.) Br] intensive. Often placed after a word to empha- 
size that single word. Several expressions above given 
might come under this head. 

Ov% ovtcos e^ei ; eyei Brj, is it not so? it is so, in- 
deed; ovtcos Br], just so; t/ Br], what now? or, precisely 
what ? ttov St?, just where? /-teyto-To? Brj, the very greatest; 
TrXelaroc Br], the very most; o? Br], the particular one 
who; teal Brj /cat, and in particular also; el Br), if in- 
deed. 

(3.) Br/ continuative and illative. 

Ovtos fiev Brj Tocavra elwev, this man accordingly spoke 
thus ; epwra • epajray Br], ask ! I ask then. 

2. BrjOev, forsooth, a strengthened form of Br], used chiefly 
in irony. 

Ovk eiu KcoXvfir) aXXa irapaiveaei Brjdev, not to inter- 
pose any obstacle, but to offer advice, forsooth. 

3. $tj7tov, and a stronger form, Br]iTovOev, are also used 
ironically, and in statements admitting no doubt. 

'Ictts B^irov, bOev r)Xuo<; aviayei icai brrov Bverai, you 
know, doubtless, where (lit. whence) the sun rises and 
where it sets ; brav em rov lttttov yevw^ai, ra tov nnro- 
Kevravpov BrjirovO ev Biarrp ago fiat, when I am mounted 
on the horse, I shall perform the deeds of the hippocentaur 
no doubt. 



126 EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. 

4. SrJTa a strengthened form of Btj. 

OvSapLci) 1 ? apa Bel aBacelv ; ov Brjra, it is not, then, by 
any means necessary to do wrong, is it ? No, certainly ! 
Mr) Brjr , d> iravres deoc, p,r)Bei<; rav6 vjjlcov eirivevaetev, 
may no one of you surely, O all ye gods, sanction these 
things ! 

5. ye (enclit. and postpos.) is intensive and restrictive, 
at least, indeed, even. 

"Eywye, I at least, I for my part ; ^aXeirov ye ae eXeygai, 
co XwKpciTes, it is hard, indeed, to refute you, Socrates ! 

6. yovv (ye, ow) a strengthened form of -ye. 

AoKel yovv fioc, it seems to me certainly, it seems to me 
at least. 

7. irep (enclit. fr. irepi, very). 

"Oirep cpero Troirjaecv rbv 'AftpofcopLav, which very thing 
he supposed Abrocomas would do. 

Note. I question the concessive meaning although, often attributed to 
irep. 

8. fJLTjV. 

Tt ovv av elrj 6 ' Epcos ; Ovtjtos ; Hklo~tcl ye. AWa 
rl fJLrjv ; What then would Eros be? Mortal? By no 
means ! But what then (what in fact) ? 

To toe Written. 

1. When they were worsted, they withdrew ; and now 
again falling in with the king, they proceeded in company. 
2. He ordered the cupbearer to draw from the bowl with 
the cyathus, and pouring into his left hand to swallow 
down (some of the contents), in order no doubt that it 
might not profit him, if he should pour in poison (into the 
bowl). 3. The kings used to order their cupbearers, when 
they offered the bowl, to draw from it and to swallow down 
(some of the contents), in order no doubt that it might not 
profit them, if they should pour in poison (into the bowl). 



LESSON xxx. 127 

4. This pollution, I say, they drove out, in order, no doubt, 
that they might avenge the gods. 5. In wishing to drive 
out this pollution, they primarily, forsooth, avenged the 
gods, but they knew that Pericles, the son of Xanthippus, 
was involved in it on his mother's side. 6. Some said that 
Tissaphernes had fallen in with the king, and that they 
now again had drawn up their lines together : accordingly, 
it did not seem to the generals expedient to fight on that 
day. 7. Accordingly, very many persons committed to 
him, more than to any other one man of those in our time, 
both their treasures and their own bodies. 8. Accordingly 
he, more than any other one man of those in our time, is 
acknowledged to have done what is best for the city. 9. 
Accordingly, very many persons acknowledge that he, more 
than any other one man of our time, does what is best for 
the city. 10. Those at least who are pursuing philosophy 
ought to become more fortunate ; but you now live in such 
a way that not even a slave would remain (with you). 
11. When it is permitted to those pursuing philosophy to 
become more fortunate, they at least live in such a way 
that not even a slave would stay (with them). 12. But 
further, he never left the devotion of any one of those who 
had served him well unrewarded. 13. But further, it is 
acknowledged by all that Cyrus never left the devotion of 
any one unrewarded. 14. But further, if the end of all 
things turns out as the deity has willed, it is not an injus- 
tice of mine at least if it happened to Philip to conquer in 
battle. 15. Sed nimirum majus est hoc quiddam, quam 
homines opinantur. 



AN ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY. 



6* 



AN 



ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY 



PRINCIPAL WORDS USED IN THE FOREGOING EXERCISES. 



Abandon, irpotepai (npo, ttpai) ; 

leave behind, KaraXei7ro). 
Able, Swards, r), 6v ; to be able, 

Bwapat; to have ability, e'xco. 
About, concerning, nepi w. gen. 
Accept, receive, de^opai, de^opai, 

ede^dpw, deoeypai. 
Accomplish as a citizen, 73-0X1- 

revopai. 
Accordingly, apa, §17, ko\ yap ovv. 
Account, on this account, 81a 

tovto; on account of, did w. ace. 
Accusation, alrla, as, r); make 

an accusation, Karnyopia, <o, 

770-0); some ground of accu- 
sation, vnalriov ri. 
Accusations, things alleged, 

to. Karrjyopnpepa. 
Accuse; see Accusation. 
Achieve, Sioikcco, co, jjcrco (Bid, 

oiKeoi). 
Acknowledge, o/zoXoyeco, co, 170-0); 

aVotioXoyeco, co. 770-co. 
Acquire, Krdopai, Krwpai, Krrjaopai, 

enrrjcrdpev, KenrnfMai, and eKTnpai. 
Act unjustly, a§t/<eco, co, 770-co; 

pres. often as pf. 

6* 



Administration, iroXiTeta, as, 7. 
Advantage, dyadov, ov, to. 
Advise, o-vp(3ov\eva>, crco. 
Affairs, n pay para, rd. 
Affirm, cpnpi, particip. cpdcrKcov. 
Afterwards, in the sense longer, 

€TL. 

Again, ndXiv. 

Against, Kara to. gen.; eni w.acc. 

Allege, speak of, tlne'iv; allege 

against, Karnyopeu), co, 770-co. 
Allow, edco, co, daw. 
Ally, avppaxos; older Att. £vp. 
Almost, okiyov biiv, oXiyov', all 

but, pdvov ov. 
Alone, povos, 77, ov. 
Although, generally expressed by 

the particip. alone; the concessive 

idea is emphasized by Kairrep. 
Am to, am about to, /xe'XXco w. 

pr. or f. infin. 
Ancestor, 7rp6yovos, ov, 6. 
Announce, aVayyeXXco (enro, ay- 

yeXXco). 
Any one, t\s. 
Anything, rl; anything else, 

aX\o TL. 

I 



132 



ENGLISH -GREEK VOCABULARY. 



Apparent; see Plain. 

Appear, <paivop.ai, <pavovp.ai, ecpn- 

vdp.nv (trans.}, 7recpao~p,ai. In a 

middle sense intrans. also ecpdvnv, 

<fiavr)o~op.ai; also intrans. necpnva. 
Apprehend, seize, o-vXXap.f3dva>; 

apprehend, fear, Seoouca. 
Argument, Xoyos, ov, 6. 
Ariseus, 'Apicuo?. 
Arise, come into being, ylyvop.ai. 
Arise, become established, *a- 

6'icrTap.ai. 
Arms, onXa, cov, rd. 
Army, arparid ; crrpdrevp-a, aros,r6. 
Arrive at, d(piKveop.ai, ovp,ai, dcpi- 

£op,ai, dcfiiKOfjLwv, d(p7y[xai, w. els 

and ace. 
As, as ; just as, wenrep; as much 

as, too~ovtos, n, o(y),...ocros, v, 

ov ; or antecedent omitted, oaos, 

rj, ov; as many as, ocroi, at, a. 
Ascertain, 7rvvBdv0p.cu, 7revaop.at, 

€7rvd6p.r)v, 7re7rvo-p.cu. 
Ashamed, am ashamed, alo~x v - 

vopai, -vvovp.ai, fjaxyvOnv ; or 

alaxyvn p.01 earw. 



Ask, inquire, epcordco, a>, 770-0), aor. 
rjpd}Trj(ra, usu. j]p6p.r)v. 

Ask, request, ask for, deop.ai, 
derjaopai, ioerjdwv, 8et)er)p,ai, W. 
gen. 

Assembly, eK<Xncrla, as, 17. 

Assiduously, awex^s; most as- 
siduously, a>s avvexecrTaTa. 

Assured, be assured, imperat. 
ofolba. 

At once, at the same time, dpa. 

Athenians, 'Adnvaloi, cov, ol. 

Attempt, 7retpdop.ai, a>p.tu, dep. 
mid. ; attempt, put the hand 
to, eyxeipea), £, t)(ra> (ev, ^e t'p) 5 
e7rt^eipeo), g>, rjaco (eici, x ei 'p)* 

Attend to, e7np.eX0p.ac and emp-e- 
Xeop.ai, ovp,ai, e7np.eX-qa0p.aL, eVe- 
peXrjOnv, e7np.ep.eXnp.a1 (rare). 

Avaricious, alaxponepb-qs, es. 

Avenge, Tip.a>pea>, g>, rjaoi- 

Avoid (see Flee), behave cau- 
tiously in respect to, evXa- 
/3eopat, ovp.ai, -rjaop.ai. 

Aware, to be aware, alaBdvop.ai, 
aladr)aop.ai, fjo-06p.r)v, fja&np-ai. 



B, 



Band together (lit. stand to- 
gether), the intrans. tenses of 

0~VVlCTTT]p.l. 

Bear; see Bring. 

Because, on; are w. a particip.; 
often denoted ly the particip. 
alone. 

Become, ylyvop.ai; become es- 
tablished, KaBio-rapat and the 
intrans. tenses of the act. 

Before; see Sooner. 



Begin, apxop.ai, a.p$-op,ai, r)p{-dp.nv, 

rjpyp.au 
Beginning, dpxdp-evos, v, ov 

(apx<»)- 
Behalf, in behalf of, farep w. gen. 
Behold, 3edop.ai, a>p,ai, daop.ai, 

eOeacrdprjV. 
Belong to, ylyvop,at. yevr)crop.ai, 

eyevop.7]v, yeyova. yeyevrjpat, W. 

gen. : Trpoaelvai w. dat. 
Bend outward, eKKvpxiivo}, ava>. 



ENGLISH -GREEK VOCABULARY. 



133 



Benefaction, €v€pyeo~ia, as. rj- 
Better, KpeiTTCdv, ov : dpelvwv, ov; 

peXricop, fieXnou : something 

better, ap.eivov. 
Beware, imperat, of 6pd<o. 
Beyond, outside of, e£o> w. gen. 
Bid; see Order. 
Boat, ttXoIov, ov to. 
Body, aa>fxa, otos, to. 
Boldly, d(j)6fi(0s ((( priv. (po/3oy). 
Book, fiifiXos, ov, rj. 
Border, opiov, ov, to. 
Born, to be born, yiyvopat. 
Boy, 7raly, iraidos, 6. 
Bowl, drinking-bowl, cpiuXn, 

T)S, T). 

Bran, nirvpov, ov, to. 

Brave, dyaOos, rj, op, in a military 

sense. 
Break, Xvat, spoken of a bridge : 



also of a treaty : break down, 

KaTanXdco, do-(o. 
Breathe, to take breath, dva- 

7TV€<o (dud, 7n/e'a), nvevaopat, 

envevcra, nenvevKa, TrerrvevapaL, 

invfvcrOnv). 
Bribe, 8i8u>pi in some connections. 
Bring, (pepco, otaa>, ffveyxa, evrj- 

vo^a, (urjveypai, r]ve-^6nv\ bring 

against, eVa-yco (eni. «ya>). 
Bring up; see Nourish. 
Burn, consume by burning, 

KaraKaico, KaTaKavcra>, tcaTe/cavcra, 

KClTOK€KaVKa, KaTdKCKavpai, KCIT€- 

Kav6nv. 
Bury, 6u7TTOi, 6d\^oi, eSayjsa, Ttdap.- 

pai, erdcprjv. 
But, dXXd, 8e, nevroi ; but also, 

dXXd <ai; but further, dXXa 

p.r)v ; but certainly, & ovv. 



Calamity, rrddos, ovs, to', kokov, \ 
ov, TO. 

Calculation, Xoyi.crp.6s, ov, 6. 
Call, name, KaXeco, a>, KaXeaoi 

(rare), usu. koXco, e/cdXeaa, <e- 

KXr)K(i. KeicXnpoi, €kXt)6t)i>. 
Calumniate, StafidXXa) (did, /3aX- ! 

X»). 
Calumny, fitaftoXr), rjs, 17. 
Canal, avXcav, iouos, 6. 
Candor, evvola, as, r). 
Capable; see Able. 
Captain, Xo%ay6s. 
Carry away, snatch away, 

apird^ai, era). 
Cast, ltjpl, tJo~o>, rjica, eiVn, (ipai. 

elOnv, fidXXco, @aXa>, efiaXov, /3e- 



ftXnica, (SefiXnpai, efiXrjOnv, cast 
over the head, fKTpa^rjXl^oj, 
icrco. or lu>. 

Cause of, causing, ahios, ia, iov, 
>r. gen. 

Cease, navopai, -cropai. 

Cemetery, pvijpa, aros, to, strictly 
a monument, csp. in memory of 
the dead; then, a place of monu- 
ments, a cemetery. 

Censure, ZyKXrjpa. otos, to. 

Censure, v., eTriTipdco, <5, 770-00 ; 
eyKaXeai, co. fVco. co. 

Cessation, navXa, ns, fj. 

Chance, happen, Tvy^dvco, tcv£o- 
pai. €Tv\ov, T€Ti>xnKa. 

Character, Tponos, ov, 6. 



134 



ENGLISH -GREEK VOCABULARY. 



Check; see Restrain. 

Chiefly, paXia-Ta. 

Child, nals, 7rai86s, 6 or 77. 

Choose, alpeopai, ovpai, alpnaopai, 
elXopnv, jjprjpat ; choose be- 
forehand, ivpoa.ipeop.ai, ovpai. 

Citizen, ttoXittjs. 

City, noXis. 

Clay, 77rj\6s, ov, 6- 

Clearly, o-a(pa>s. 

Collect, avXXeyco, avXXe£a>, crvve- 
Xe£a, avveiXoxa., avveiXtypai, 
cvveXeynv. 

Come, epxofiai, f. in Attic elpi, 
fj£a>, d(p{£opai, rare eXevaopm, 
ao. rjXOov, pf. iXrjXvda; as inter- 
jec. (fiepe, (pepe drj] am come, 
rjiccoi come forward, napeipi 
(napa, ei/xt); come up,, come 
towards, irpoatipi (rrpos. tlpi). 

Come about ; see Become. 

Commander, apxa>v, ovtos. 6. 

Commissioner, irpeo~$vTns, ov, 6; 
plur. 7rpeo-{3ei.s, ecov, 01 ■ 

Commit, npolnpL (jrpn, Inpt). 

Compel, dvayicdfa, -daco. 

Competent ; see Able. 

Complain, avKocpavTeco, a> -qcrai. 

Condition, on this condition 
that, eVi tovtco, £(j) core; on 
condition that, e<£' <u or ifi 
core. 

Conduct ; see Lead. 

Conquer, vlkckh. co, tjoco, w. ace.; 
Kpareco, eo, 770-0), W. gen. 

Conscious, am conscious, uvv- 
oiSa ipavTco. 

Consider, oKoneca, a>, also aKoiveo- 



pai, ovpai, f. o-K.fyop.ai, aor m 
eo-Ke\j/dp.r)v, pf. ecrKeppai: later 
aKonrjaco, io-Konncra, etc.; rjyeo- 
pai ovpai, rjyf]o~ofiai, rjynadpnv, 
rjynpai. 

Constantly; see Assiduously. 

Construct, £evyvvpi. £ev£;a>,€£ev£;a, 
e&vxa, c&vyfiai. efcvxOnv. 

Contemporaries, our contem- 
poraries, 01 €(p y T)pa>v. 

Continually, often expressed by 
SiareXo). 

Contrary to, napd w. ace. 

Convict, e£e\eyxco. -£a>. 

Convince; see Persuade. 

Co-operate, to co-operate with 
in a war against, avp-oXepea) 
(avv, TroXepeca), cu, w. dat. fol- 
lowed by irti vs. ace. 

Corcyra, Kcpicvpa. a?, rj. 

Corrupt, BiacpOeipa ; try to cor- 
rupt, pres. and imperf. 

Council, crwedpiov. ov. to 

Counsellor, avpfiovXos. ov. 6. 

Counted, easily counted, ela- 
pidprjTOs. ov (ft'. dpidpUoo. do). 

Country, x&>pa. as. r r 

Cowardly, Kaxos. tj. ov\ in a 
cowardly manner, Ka<a>s. 

Crime, unjust act, ddiKvpa. otos, 
to. 

Cross over, diafiaiva (did, '3aiva>). 

Cry aloud, j3oda>. a. f. ^orjaopai ; 
dvafipvxdopai. -copai- 

Cultivate, denceo). co, ^crco: verb, 
adj. daKTjTeos. a, ov. 

Cupbearer, olvoxoos, ov. 6. 

Cyrus, Kvpos. 



ENGLISH -GREEK VOCABULARY. 



135 



D. 



Danger, icivdvvos, ov, 6; to be in 
danger, Kivdwevco ; to be fore- 
most in danger, npoKivdvveva). 

Dare, roX/zao), to, 770-0). 

Darkness, o~kotos, ov, 6. 

Daughter, 6vydrr\p. 

Death, BdvaTos, ov, 6; put to 
death, aTTOKTeivco. 

Debate, \6yot, ov, 6. 

Deceive, e£o7rarao>, o>, -770-07. 

Declare, Xeyo); *«« Speak. 

Deed, thing done, npdypa, aros, 
to. 

Defendant, 6 cpevyaiv, ovtos- 

Defence, tpvpa, aros. to. 

Deity, dalpcov, 01/09. 6. 

Deliberate, fiovXevopat. 

Deliver up, 7Tapadi8o)pi (napd, 
didiopi). 

Deliverance; see Safety. 

Demand {on the ground of worthi- 
w), a£i6o). o), d)Oco. 

Deny, KaTapveopai, oipai. 

U8U, dpveopai, ovpai. dpvt]o-opai, 
TjpvrjOrjv. fjpvrjpai \ ov (ptjpt. 

Deride, fiioyeXoo), (Sid, yeXao)). 

Desire, emOvpea), to, 7)0-0). 

Destroy, SiacpOdpco, diacpOepci). 8V 



eCpOeipa, hiz(p6apKa, bu<p6appai, 

8ie(p0dpr]v : of a bridge, Xjjco. 
Devotion, irpoOvpla, as. 77. 
Die, reXfuraoo. 00, -770-0) : 6vqo~K(o 

and d7ro6i>T)crKOi, diioOavovpai, 

dntdavov, TtBvqKa) die with, 

a t>fa7ro6V77 o"ko). 
Difficulty, with difficulty, po- 

Xls. 
Disease, voaos, ov, 77. 
Disregard, dpeXeco, <b, 770-0). 
Dissipation, dKoXaata, as, 77 (a 

y//V. KoXa^o), to check, chastise). 
Ditch, Tacppos, ov, 77. 
Distinctly, aacpws: romp, aaqbe- 

orepov. sup. oacpearara- 
Divine being, 8dov, ov, to. 
Do, make, noteo), ok 770-0) : npdrTai, 

£0), iirpa^a. TVinpaxa. TreVpay/xai, 

cnpd)(8r)i> : (pyd£opai, dcropai. 

Dog, KVUiV, KVVUS- 6. 

Domestic (subst.), oIkcttjs, ov, 6. 

Draw (of a liquid), dpvco and 
dpvTco. nor. fjpvaa. 

Drive, e'XaiW, eXdo-co, usu. eXo>, 
r/Xoorr, 6X77X0x0, (XrjXapai, rjXd- 
6r)V, kite (\rp\ao-pai. rjXdadrjv. 

During, <aTa w. ace. 



E. 

Each, eKao~ros, 77, ov; on each Either... or, 77... 77. 

occasion, oeuoroTe. ; Eloquent, deivos Xeyetv. 

Easily, ewe-rco?. End, nepas, otos, to. 

Easy, pddios. a, ov. Endure, iTropevco. a> (vno, pevoo). 

Educate, naiScvco. evaco. Enemy, the enemy, 01 noXepioi: a 

Effeminacy, paXania, as, h- ' personal enemy, e^dpos, ov, 6. 



136 



ENGLISH -GREEK VOCABULARY. 



Engagement, occupation, acr^o- 

Xla, as, f). 
Enough, iKavos, rj, ov. 
Enter, embark, epfialvco; const. 

els w. ace. 
Entire, whole, o\os, rj, ov. 
Envoy, to go as envoy, irpecr- 

(3eva>, -evo~a>. 
Err, dpapTavto, dpapTTjaopai, rjpap- 

tov fjpdprnKa. 
Escape, escape from, (pevya w. 

ace. ; also anoobevyco, and eiccpev- 

yo»; to escape, pass along 

by, napepxopai. 



Especially, pakio~Ta, sup. of pAXa. 
Even, (cat; not even, ov8e; even 

if, Kal el; if even, although, 

el Kal. 
Event, deed, epyov, ov, to. 
Every, every one, ovbels oans ov. 

Evil, KOKOV, oi>, TO. 
Examine, e^eTafa, do~<o. 
Except, 7r\r)v, more emphat. rfkrjv 

ye. 
Expect, TrpoahoKau), a>, rjo~a>. 
Extravagant assertion, tnepfio- 

\r], T)S, T). 

Extreme, eax aT0S > Vi ov - 



Fabricate (for one's self), nXdo- 
o~opai, TTopai, rikdaopai, eVXacra- 
pnv, TreTv\ao~pai. 

Face, 7rp6aa>nov, ov, to. 

Fail, often expressed by the neg. ov 
or prj. 

Fall, 7ri7rra), 7reaovpai, eneaov, Tren- 
Toxa; fall to one's lot, ylyvo- 
pai w. dat. ; fall in with, 
evTvyxavto, and avvTvyxava) W. 
dat. ; fall under, ylyvopai ev ic. 
dat. ; fall into the power of, 
ylyvopai eirl w. dat. ; fall into 
other hands, be alienated, 
dX\oTpioopaL< ovpai. 

Falsehoods, false things, ^evo^r), 
Ta,fr. cpevbrjs, es. 

Falsely allege, KaTasjsevdopat 
{KaTa, -ty-evhopai). 

Familiar conversations, vvvov- 
o-'ia, as, r). 

Fated, Trenpwpevos, rj, ov. 



Favor, to receive a favor, ev 
7ra<r^Q) ; to do a favor, ev 



TTOteCO, 0). 



Fear, (poftovpai spoken of sudden 
and inconsiderate fear; bedoi- 
Ka, dedia, of deliberate and 
reasonable fear ; as subst. <p6- 
/3oy, ov. 6. 

Fellowship, Koivcovla, as, t]. 

Few, oXi'yot, ai. a. 

Fight, p,axopai. paxovpai. epaxeo~d- 
prjv pepdxqpai \ fight in a naval 
engagement, vavpaxeoo, d>. i]aa> 

(vavs. pax*])' 
Find, evplo-K<o, evprjo-oo. eipov and 

nvpov, evpnita, evprjpai, evpeQnv. 

All the augmented tenses may 

begin with nv-. 
First, 7rpa>Tos. n. ov: first (of 

two persons), nporepos. a. ov ; 

to be first, 7rpcoTevco, evaco: at 

first e£ apx^s- 



ENGLISH -GREEK VOCABULARY. 



137 



Flee, (pevyco, (pev^opai or <pev£ov- 

pai, <?<fivyov, necpcvya. 
Food, alros, ov. 6. 
Foolish, €vt]6t]s, cs. 
Toot,7rovs,7ro86s.6 ; on foot, 7Te£j}. 
For, in behalf of, vnep w. gen. 
Forbid, d-rrocpTjpi, aor. dnelnov 

(and. (fiijpi). 
Foreknow ; see Know. 
Foretell, npoXeyco (npo, Xeyco). 
Forget, imXavOdvopai (inl, XavOd- 



vopai. XrjO-opac. iXaQ6pr)v, Att. 
prose eneXaOoprjv). 

Formerly, nporepov. 

Forsooth, br)6cv. 

Fortunate, evrv^r, es: ev8aipu)v, 
ev8aipov. 

Free, eXevdepos, a, ov] autono- 
mous, CLVTUVOpOS, ov. 

Freeman, iXevdepos, ov, 6. 
Friend, cpiXos, ov, 6. 
Full, 7rXr)pr]s, es, W. gen. 



Glory {verb), dydXXopai; act. 

aytiXXco, to adorn. 
Go in, flaep^opat. f. ctcrfipi (els, 



peifav: sup. /ie'yio-ro? : so great, 

TOO~OVTOS. T), O v). 

Greater numbers, nXcioves or 



ei/ii). imperf. clcrrjciv, and daya; nXciovs. 



Greek, "EXXtjv, os, 6; as adj. 

'EXXrfviKos, t), ov. 
Grief, Xvttt], tjs, t). 



go away, dncpxopai. 
Good-will, cvvoia, as. rj. 
Grandly, peyaXoTrpencos. 

Grant, give, 8i8copi, Soxro), (duxa, Guard against, (pvXaTTopat ic. ace. 

8(8a)Ka, dedopai, edoOrjv. Guest, £evos, ov. 6. 

Great, peyas, pfydXt), peya; romp. Guide, Tjyepcov, ovos, 6. 



Habit, ZOos, ovs, to. 

Hand, ^f/p. x (i pos. fj. 

Happen, trvpfiaivrjo: what has 

happened, ra avpfidvra: to 

happen, to chance, rvyxdvco, 

rrv£o/uu, Ztvxov, rerL>x r l Ka - 
Happy, prosperous, riSalpav, 

ev8aipov (fv. 8o.lp.aiv); to count Head, tceCpaXr]. tjs. rj. 

happy, evdaipovifa. iaco. ico. Hear, aKovco aKovcropai, late dtcov- 

Haste, hasten, to be in haste, rra>. rJKovtra. d<r]Koa, fJKovcrpai. late, 

tnrev8co, -aai, ecnrevoa, eWer/m rjKovaOrjv. 

(late), ecnrevtrpai. Help on, ivdyco. -£co (eV. ayco). 



Hate, ptaecc, co. fjcrco. 

Have, hold, f^co, e£&>. or o-^^o-co, 
6(7^oi/. eaxrjKa, ecrxvpai. io-x^v. 

Have conquered, am victori- 
ous over, vlkco (aco). 

Have wronged, injured, d§i- 

K60). CO. 



138 



ENGLISH -GREEK VOCABULARY. 



Herald, nr}pv%, vkos, 6. 

Hinder, kcoXvm, vara', be in the 
•way of, ejxTTohcov w. eivai ex- 
pressed or understood. 

Hire, wages, fxioSos, ov, 6; for 
hire, u.ta6ov; to hire, u.ia66o- 
fj.ai, ovp.ai, ooaofiai. 

Hireling, picrdcoros, ov, 6. 

Hither, devpo. 

Hold; see Have. 

Home, towards home, ot/caSe; at 
home, oI'koi; from home, o'Uodev. 



Honor, rifirj, rjs, 17; to honor, 

Ttfiao), d>, -r)o~co. 
Honorable, <a\6s, rj, ov. 
Horse, tWos-, ov, 6. 
Horseman, 'nnrevs, eons, 6. 
How? 7rcos; how, as relat. adv. 

cos', how much? ttooos, tj, ov; 

in plur. how many? 
However, /xeWoi. 
Humor, to be in ill-humor, 

dvax^pdivoo. 



I, eyco ; I for my part, I at least, 

eycoye. 
If, ei w. indie, or optat.; idv (fjv, 

av) w. subjunc. 
Ill, badly, kcikus. 
Immediately, airUa. 
Impassable, ddvvaTos 8La{3r)vai. 
Impeachment, eicray-yeAia, ay, 17. 
Impend, euapTdop,ai, oopai, Tjaopai. 
Incomplete, areA^y, ey. 
Incorrigible, to be incorrigible, 

€X fiV dvidrcos- 
Indict, ypdcpopai. -^rojxai (ypd(pa>, 

ypayj/oi. eypa^a, yeypacpa. yk- 

ypappai, iypci<p6nv, eypcKprjv) 



Indictment, ypacprj, r)y, fj. 
Indigence, evSeia, as, 17. 

Inflict, €7TlTl3rjpL. 

Initiated, to be initiated, reXeo- 
pai. ovpaL. reXecro/jtai. oi'/xai, rerk- 
Xeo-p-aL, ereXeaBrjv. 

Injustice, a§i/a'a, as. 17: an un- 
just act, dt!)iK7)p.a, aroy. to- 

Insult, treat with insolence, 
v$pi£<o, I'tSpicra) or vfipico. idpicra, 
vfipata. vi3ptap.ai, v$pio~6nv. 

Intend, Siavoeop,ai, ovpai, 170-0- 
uai. . 

Involved, to be involved in, 
Trpoae^opaL it', dat. 



Jest, 7rai£a), 7rai£c», iral^opai and Judge, or juror, BtKacrrqs. ov. 6. 
nai^ovpLai, enaio-a, TrenaiKa later Just, diicaios. a. ov: justly, ducalus; 



7re7rat^a, Tre-rraio-pai later iveitaLy- 
pai, i7raix0rjv\ to speak in jest, 

\eyetv naifav. 



just as, (ooirep. 



ENGLISH - GREEK VOCABULARY. 



139 



Keep (a peace), Syta (flprjvnu). 

Keep off, dnepvicco (arro, ipvuoa. 
epv£eo, rjpv£a) ; in keeping with, 
npos w. gen. 

King, fiaaiXtvs, etos, 6; to be 
king, /3ao-iAevo; aor. to be- 
come king. 



Knee, yuw, aros, to. 

Know, ot'Sa, elo~opai\ yiyvooaKoi, 
yvaxropai, eyvcov, eyixoKa, Zyvoia- 
/xai, iyv6i(rBr]v\ not to know, 
dyvoea>, ai, J^croo; foreknew, 
7rpooiSa. 



Labor, tvov oy, ov, 6. 

Language, (pooi/q, rjy, j?. 

Large, peyas, peydXrj. peya. 

Law, vopos, ov. 6 ; lawsuit, di<T). 
r)s, 17. 

Lay claim, a£too>, <3, -cocra>. 

Lead, cryoo. «£a>, rjyayov, »7X a ' VyH-" 1 ' 
f)X0T)v; l eao ^ against, (ryu>, eVi 
»•. ace. 

Leave, Xeirroi, Xei'\//oo. eXi7roi/, XeXoi- 
7ra, XeXfLppat. iX(i(p6rjV. those 
who are left, 01 Xoinoi, ai. d: 
leave, allow, e'cu», <io, ao-00. 

Left, Xoinos. r). 6v. the part left, 
to emXcnropevov : left, as op- 
posed to right, dpia-Tepos, d, 6v. 

Let go, dcplrjpi (dno. 1r]pi). 

Liberty, eXevdepla, as. 7. 

Lie, Ke'ipai. Keicropai. 

Lighten, do-rpdirroi, -x/z-oo. 

Like, similar, opoios, a. ov; in 
like manner, opoios. 



Like to, expressed by ^decos (gladly), 

and the optat. W. civ. 
Line of battle, cfidXayg, yos, rj. 
Linger; u t "Wait. 
Listen to, aKovco 10. gen, or ace. 
Little, not a little, oi>x rjiao-Ta. 
Live, be alive, £dco, c3, rjaco. 
Look, /3Xe7ro>, \j/co, and \j/opai, 

eilXeyj/a, /3e'/3Xe(pa, fiefiXeppat, 

€ii\e(f)0T]v. 
Look-at-attentively, enco^-eco, <5, 

o~K.tyopai, icTKe^dprjv. 
Long (adv.), long ago, -ndXai. 
Longer, yet, still, en ; no longer, 

OVKfTi, prjKCTi (also writ/f n sepd- 

rati ///. oik en ; pr) . . . eVi, pijS' 

frt). 
Lost, to be lost, a7r6XXvpai. 
Loth, to be loth, okvcco, co, 

■qaco. 
Lucky, fortunate, eidaipcov, ev- 

daipov. 



M. 

Make, noieco. <u. 170-00; make for Many, noXXol, ai, a. 

one's self, (he mid. March, nopevopai dep. pass. ; 

Man, human being, dvdpamos; march against, nopevopai ini 

Lat. vir, dvrjp. dvSpos, 6. w. ace. 
Manifest, S^Xoy. 77, ov. 



140 



ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY. 



Master, Kvpios, ov, 6; as adj. kv- 

pios, ia, iov, w. gen. 
Measure; see Deed. 
Meet ■with, avyyiyvop.ai w. dal. 
Mention, make mention of, 

remember, p,ep,vr)p.at. 
Midst, in the midst of, p.eTa£v. 
Midwinter, p.eaos xei/xo)z>. 
Might, aOivos, ovs, to; with all 

one's might, navrl aOevei. 
Mind and heart, vovs kcl\ cppeves; 

mind, thought, Sidvoia, as, f). 
Mischief, kokov, ov, to. 
Misunderstanding, dyv(op.oo~vvr). 



Mis (by rubbing or bruising'), rpl- 

Mix a bowl (of wine), KpaTnpifa. 

Money, xpVH- aTa ' 

Monition, sign, o-np.el.ov, ov, to< 

Month, p.r)v, p.nvos, 6. 

Most, nXelaroi, sup. ofiroXvs: the 

most, the many, ol noXXoi. 
Most, greatest, especially, p.e- 

yio-Tov ; for the most part, to 

nXelarov. 
Mother, p.r\rqp, Tpos, r). 
Much, so much, too-ovtos, to- 

aavTn, too~ovto(v). 



N. 



Narrowly, a little, p.iKpov. 

Nature, qbvais, ecus, f). 

Near, eyyvs. 

Necessary, unavoidable, dvay- 

kolos, a, ov: an unavoidable 

necessity, dvdyKrj, ns, rj; it is 

necessary, del, xpv- 
Need ; see Ask. 
Neglect, napap-eXeco, cb, rjaa> W. 

gen., iXXelirco, -yj/co (ev, XetVa)). 
Never, ovnore, p,r]ivoTe, ovdenoTe, 

p.rjbe7roT€ ; never up to the 

present time, ov8end)7roTe, p.rj- 

denutnoTe. 
Nevertheless, o/icay, ou p,rjv dXXd. 
New (in kind), kulvos, t), 6v; new 

(but not in kind), veos, a, ov. 



Noble, yewalos, a, ov ; xpnaros, tj, 

6v, adv. yevvaitos- 
Noise (shouting or calling), 

Kpavyrj. tjs, tj. 
No longer ; see Longer. 
No one, ol&els. p.rj$eis ; more em- 

phat. ovbe els, p-rj^e els- 
Not, ov, ovk, oi>x- p-rj j not a little, 

oix fjiao~Ta 
Nourish, Tpecpoo, Sps-^co, edpe^a, 

TeTpocpa, Tedpap.p.a.1, edpeCpOnv, 

oftener eTpdqbnv. 
Now, vvv: as temporal oid illative, 

vvv, Sr) : now again, 8rj naXtv. 
Nowhere, ovdap.ov, or .sometimes 

ovdap.rj. 
Numberless, p.vploi, iai, ia. 



Oath, ZpKos, ov, 6. | Observe, Bevpeco, £>, rjo-co. 

Object, it is an object, imp.eXes Offend, cause pain to, Xvra, <£, 
«Vn(i/). fa^ gft QCC% 



ENGLISH -GREEK VOCABULARY. 



141 



Offer, btbcofjLt in pres. and imperf. 

Often, ttoWclkis. 

Old, jrpevfivTTjs, ov, 6; subst. or adj. 

Only, povov. 

Open, dvoiyiwpi, dvoiyco, later dvoi- 

yvva>, dvoitjco, dvea>£a, rare dve- 

(oypai, due co^drju. 
Opinion, 86£a; vttoXtj^/is, eoos, rj\ 

to be of an opinion, fjyiopai., 

ovpai, vofii£(o. 

OppOSe, CVaUTlOCO, CO, U)(T<0. 



Opposed to, ivavTLoopaL, -ovpai, 

-edo-ofiai. 
Orator, prjTap, opos, 6; dvrjp prjTwp. 
Order, KeXevco, KeXtvo-co, eiceXevo-a, 

KtKcXevKa, K€K.e\ev(rp.ai, eKeXev- 

adnv. 
Other, aXXos, -n, o; eTepos, a, o; 

otherwise, aXXcos. 
Ought, it is necessary, del, xph- 
Overcome ; see Break. 
Own, personal, tdios, iSia, Xdiov. 



p. 



Pass by, omit, trans. napaXeiTrco 
(napd, Xei7r&)). 

Pay, p.io-06s, ov, 6; receive pay, 
piadupveco, d), r}o"co. 

Peace, elpi]vn, ns, rj. 

Penalty, a fine, (npia; punish- 
ment, Tiptopia, as, rj. 

Perform, npdrrco, £a>; noieco, <o. 

Perish, aVoXcoXa, pf. 2,ofdn6XXvpi. 

Permanent, fieftaios. aia, aiov. 

Permit, erriTpeTroa (eVt. Tpeiroi). 

Persuade, TteiOoa, nelaco, eTveiva, 
7T€TT€iKa and 7renoi6a (intrans. 
and pres. I trust), ireireiapai, 
C7r(ia6rjv', in the pres. and imperf. 
often, try to persuade. 

Persuasion, to change one's 
opinion by persuasion, pera- 
7rei6(0 w. ace. of pers. (perd, 
ire'iOai). 

Philip, <$[Xmnos, ov, 6. 

Philosopher, cpiXoaocpos, ov, 6; 
to be a philosopher, <£iXocro- 
(pico, w; aor. to become a phi- 
losopher; those who are pur- 



suing philosophy, ol (piXoao- 

(povvres. 
Physician, larpos, ov, 6. 
Plain, brjXos, r;, ov; (pavepos, a, 6v\ 

make plain, dnXoco, &>, focrco; 

plainly, fyXcos, often expressed 

bij (paivopai. 
Plan, Tvpoaipeo-is, em, 17; to plan, 

ftovXevopai. 
Pleased, to be pleased, rjdopai, 

Tja6r]aopai. rjadrjv. 
Poison, (pdppaKou, ov, to. 
Political act, noXiTevpa, aros, to. 
Pollution, ciyos, ovs, to. 
Poor, a poor man, nevrjs, -tjtos, 

subst. or adj. 
Position (in a line), rank, Ta£is, 

ccos\ 77. 
Possess, see Have ; tceKTTjpai, pf 

of KTaopai. 
Possible, it is possible, eo-ri(i>), 

eveari, evi; "was possible, r\v, 

evr\v. 
Pour in, iy-^ifo (eV, x ea) )' 
Power, dvvapis, eajs, 17 ; to have 



142 



ENGLISH -GREEK VOCABULARY. 



power, hvvapai ; in the power 

of, dependent upon, eVi w. dat. 
Powerful, deivos, rj, ov. 
Practically, in deed, epyco, dat. 

ofepyov. 
Practise, do, notea, a>. 
Praise, eVcuveo), &>, enaLveaco, usu. 

eTraivecrofxai, enrjvecra, infjveKa, 

€7T^vr)fJ.ai, eirrjvedrjv. 
Prevent; see Hinder. 
Primarily, nptoTov. 
Prison, decrpcoTrjpiov, ov, to. 
Private man, 18lcottjs, ov, 6. 
Privateer, Xrjo-Trjs, ov, 6. 
Proceed-step-by-step, /3a§i'£», 

iaa>, ico. 
Proclaim, say beforehand, 7rp6- 

(prjfJLi (jrpo, <prjpi). 
Profit, to be profitable, Xvaire- 

Xeo), a>, T]o~a>; avpcpepco (avv, <pe- 

pco) ; that which is profitable 

to, to crvp<p€pov. 



Proper, it is proper, xPV- 
Propose, 7rpoTL0r)pi. 
Prosecuted, to be prosecuted, 

to be put on trial (as a law 

term), favyeo, or more fullyypacpTjv 

(pevyoo. 
Prosecutor, 6 diooKcov, ovros. 
Proud, to be proud, aepvvvopai, 

ovpaL. 
Provisions, imrqSeia, a>v, to.. 
Public, koivos.t), 6v, public man, 

drjpoTiKos, ov, 6 : belonging to 

the people, d-npocrios, la. tov. 
Punish, Tipcopecj, a>, T]aa>. 
Punishment; see Suffer. 
Purification, nadappos, ov. 6. 
Pursue, StcoAcco, £co, and £opai, e'Si- 

eo£a, 8edia>xa, dedlcoypat (late), 

Put or place in, evTifypi: put 
out of the way, eK-rrodoov noie- 
"icrOai. 



Q. 



Quick ; see Sharp. 



| Quickly, Ta%v, ra^e'coy. 



R. 



Raise up, dvio-rnpi (ava, ?o~Tripi). 

Rally, come together, awdpxo- 
pai; to rally beforehand, npo- 
ti-avio-Tapai (irpo, ava, la-Trjpi), 
w. pf.plupf. and 2 aor. in the act. 
voice. 

Rate, at any rate, yovv. 

Read, dvayiyvooaKoo (ava, yiyvoocrKoa). 

Recover, dva\ap(3avco. 

Reflect, think, cppoveco, co, -r)o~co. 

Refute, e^eXe'y^co, £co; aTro\vopai. 



Regard, Xd-yos', ov. 6. 
Rehearse, dnayyeWco. 
Release, diraXXayf), yjs. f). 
Remain, pevco, a>, reg.\ remain 

On, €TTipevco. 
Remember, pepvnpai, pvr)cr6r)ao- 

I*ol (pepvrjaouai. will bear in 

mind), (pvqo-drjv. 
Remiss, to be remiss, dpe\eco, 

a, rjaco. 
Render, make, ttouco, a>. f)o~a>. 



ENGLISH -GREEK VOCABULARY. 



143 



Reply, dnoKptvopat, oipai, dneicpi- 

vdpTJV. d7TOK(Kpipt.ai. 

Reproach, cast reproach, (Wi- 
di£co. to), late t'cro), ajveidiaa. ujvel- 
dtica, late oiveihiaOqv: (tkqitttco, 
<TKa)\^co,ecr*ca)\//a, ZaKaoppai, ecrKO)- 
Cpdrjv. 

Reputable, dt-ioXoyos, ov (u£ios\ 
Xoyos-). 

Reputation, du£a, as, fj- 

Require; tee Ask. 

Resemble, eoiica, cancci*. 

Responsible, alrios, ia, iov, ic. 
gt a. 

Rest; set Lie. 



Restrain, eVe\<a (em, ^X 00 )' see 

also Hinder. 
River, norapos, ov, 6. 
Robe, or dress up, in fawn 

skins, ve^pt(o). 
Rotten, aaOpos, a, 6v. 
Royal, (3ao-i\iKus, r). ov. 
Ruined, utterly ruined, eguXrjs 

kci\ npooiX^s- 
Rule, iipx<*>. «p£&>, rjp$a. rjp)(a, rjpy- 

pai. rjpx^n v - 
Run, 6(0). devtrofuUi a rare iron!: 

oflener rpe\co, dpapovpai, edpa- 

fiov, fodpapnica; to run hastily, 

dpopai 6tlv. 



Safe, daCpaXrjs, if. 

Safety, crcoT/jpui. as, f)- 

Sail, nXeco, nXtvaopai ana' nXcv- 
auipai, enXevaa, ntnXevKa, ne- 
7iX€vapai,€TrX(vadriu: sail away, 
a7ronXto). 

Sanction, nod assent to, tVi- 

Save, crco^o), aojaui, eo-a)(ra, aeaa)- 
pai, usu. aeo-G)o-pai. (tor, always 
icroiBrjv; to come off in safety, 
pass. <iin/ mid. 

Say, (pr)p.i, (prjau), usu. epa>, aor. 
cinov or rare enra, iiprjKa, etprjpai, 
epprjBijv. 

School, school-room, 8i8aa<a- 
Xetov, ov, to. 

Scream, *cpa£co, Kacpd^opai (rare), 
Kpdtjo) (late), eicpatja (ran and 
late)) eicpayov (chiefly in com- 
pos.), KeKpaya (as prex.). 

Search for, £r)Tea>. o>, r)aa>. 



Seek; 

Seems, it seems, (oik((v): 8o<€7\ 

seems expedient, Soicri. 
Seize and carry off, &pndfa, 

dpndrrut. oftt fii r dpirdo~opai. tjpTra- 

aa, jjpnaKa, rjp7raapai. ijpTrdo~6r]v\ 

not A ft. np7ru£o) kt€. 
Sell, 7ra>Xc'a>. S>,f. aTToboiaopai, aor. 

d-ncboprjv. j>J. ntirpaKa. 
Send, 77tpTru), n^p^co, e7rfp\//a, ire- 

7T0p(pa. 7T€7T€ppai, €7rep<p0T)v. 

Serve, vTrvpfreco, a>. t]o-(o. 
Service, public service, >fi- 

rovpyia, as. tj: to perform a 

public service, Xerroupyeco, co. 
Set, put, set down, TiOrjpi. Bqa-v, 

edrjKa, Te6(iKa. redeipai. ereBnv; 

set on foot, initiate, eWo-n/pi. 
Share in, pere^a) (perd. e^co) w. 

gen.; share with, peradidapi 

w. dat. and gen. of the thing 

shared. 



144 



ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY. 



Sharp, ogvs, eta, v. 

Sheep, 7rpo/3ara, tov, rd. 

Shout, /3oda>, w, 770-0). 

Show, deiKWfJ.1, Sei£o), eS«£a, 8c'- 

8ei^ a ' Se'Sety/xai, ideixOnv. 
Sick, the one who is sick, 6 

Ka/ii/coz>. 
Sit, KaOnpai', sit in attendance 

on, npoo-edpeixo Trpos w. dot. 
Slander, {$\a.o~<pnp.ia. as. f). 
Slave, di/Spa7ro8oi', oi», to; o'ouXoy, 

ov, 6. 
Slay, kill, dVrcKTeii/o), airoKTeva), 

dneicTeiva, direicTova. 
Slow, (Spadvs, eia, v. 
So, thus, ourcos; so that, ware: 

so and so, to kcu to. 
Sobriety, acocppoo-vvn, 77?, 17 (o-oS- 

0po)j/, sober). 
Socrates, l&Kpdrqs, ovs. 6. 
Soldier, o-TpaTiwTrjs. ov. 6. 
Some persons, eartv ol\ elcr\v oil. 
Somewhere, nov (enclit.)\ ic.gen. 

somewhere within. 
Sooner than, 7rp6o~0ev 7rplv, irpo- 

repov npiv, or wpiv alone. 
Sophist, ao(pio~Tr)s. ov. 6: to play 

the sophist, o~o(pi£op.ai. 
Soul, ^\rv\r), r)$. 77. 
Speak, Xe'yo), Xe£o). eXe£a, XfXey- 

pai, e\exOrjv: speak ill of, /3Xao"- 

(p77pe'a>, co. 77(70). 

Speech, \6yos. ov. 6. 

Speedy, tuxvs, ela v: speedily, 

iv rd^ei ; see Quickly. 
Stand, pf. plupf. 2 aor. and f. pf. 

OflO-TTjpL. 

State, 7r6\is, ecos, 77. 



Statesman, 7to\ctik6s, ov, 6. 

Stay around; see "Wait. 

Steal, kXcVto). 

Still, yet, eVt. 

Stone-to-death, /cara7rerpoo), a>, 
oxro). 

Stop, put a stop to, Travco. 

Strange, 6avp.ao~r6s, 77, ov. 

Strong, lo~\vpos. d. 6v\ to be 
strong, icr^to), tjcto). 

Submit one's self, -napiyai ic. re- 
flex, pran. 

Successful, to be successful 
KaTop86a>, u). cocro). 

SuCh, T010VT0S, TOLdVTT). TOUOVTo{v). 

Suffer, 7rdcr^o), nelaofxai. ZnaQov, 
TTiTrovOa: suffer punishment, 
give satisfaction, 8i86vat diiajv, 
suffer wrong, d8iiceop.ai. oipat. 

Sufficient, licavos. 77. ov. 

Suggest, l7T0pip.VT]aK0i (tTTO. filpLVT)- 

Suitable, fTriTrj^eios. a, ov: it is 

suitable, TrpoarjKa.. 
Sunrise, at sunrise, dp.a 77X10) 

dvareWovri. 
Superior to, Kpeirrcov. Kpel-rrov, 

iv. gen. 
Suppose, vopifa: rjy*opai. otpxit: 

otofiai. or oipai: VTroXap^avto. 
Suspect, iTroTrrevco. 
Suspicion, to view with sus- 
picion, vcpopdoixai. o>pai 
Swallow down, KaTappo<pea>. <o. 

770-0). 
Swerve from, dcpio-rap.ai ic. gen. 

verb. adj. d-ooraTeos. 
Swift, Ta^vs, eia. v. 



ENGLISH- GREEK VOCABULARY. 



145 



Take, \ap(5dva>, \r)\j/opai, VKafiov. 
("iXrjcfia, ("tXTjppai, £Xr)(p6r]v\ to 
be taken or overtaken, dX icr- 
Kopai,d\ojaopai. (d\(ov,a>t(l rjXcov, 
edXcoKa: take back, d—o\up ; 3d- 
voi', take care, (ppovrifo. iau>, 
«£>; take the field, crTpaTevopai; 
take place, yiyvopai ; take up, 
atpco dpa), r)pa, r)pica, ripp.au r)p6r)v. 

Tears, to shed tears, 8aKpC(o,-o-co. 

Terrible, Seii/dy, 77, 01/. 

Terrify, eWXjjrTa), f'mrXij^w, t'^e- 
7rXr;^a, (tjenXdyrjv. 

Territory, ^oopa, a?, 77. 

Testimony, papTvpla, as, r). 

That or lest, <{//tr perfo of fear- 
ing, pi): that, oj declaraii 
June, ort, cbt; in order that, 
Zwi 0770)$-, 0)9, tou IP. the infin. 

Then, at that time, t6t€ ; then, 
04 COrrtL Oj enftbr), ivrav$a. 

Thence, from thence, ckcIBw. 

Therefore, roivvv, ovv, apa, dio7T(p. 
<oo~re. 

Things done, rd iienpaypiva. 

Think, otopai, ofiener oipai, olr)ao- 
pau u>i]Bt)v\ have in mind, 
(ppov€o>,u>, r)o~(o: think proper, 
think worthy, d^iuco, £>. d>cra>. 

This, ovtos, avTT), tovto ; this man 
here, ovroai. 



Through, of time, the ace. case; 
through, by means of, Bid iv. 
ace. 

Thunder, fipovrda), &>, -770-0). 

Thus, so, in that case, ovtoos. 

Till; tee Until. 

Time, %p6vos, ov, 6; favorable 
or fitting time, tempos, ov, 6; 
at the same time, dpa; the 
coming time, d ptWcov ala>v. 

To, into, ds; towards, i-nl, irpos, 
ir. arc. • to, or into, the pres- 
ence of, napd W. ace. 

Town, place, ^copiov, ov, rd. 

Treasures, etp, money, xpr)para, 
droav, rd. 

Treat ill, kukojs ttokiv. 

Treaty, anovdai, wv, at Strictly, 
libations as the sign of a treaty. 

True, dXrjdr'is, es. 

Truth, dXrjBua, as, r): true things, 
rd dXrjdr); to tell, speak the 
truth, to report truly, 0X7- 
6evui, -evaa. 

Try, TTfipdopai. (opai, Trapdaropat 
late 7reipaSi)aopai, tTTftpaadprjv 
and ircfipdBr]v, TKTTfipapai. 

Turn, Tpenco, rpe'\//a), eTpc\j/a, re- 
Tpofpa, Terpappai, erpe(p^7ii/; 2 
aor. tTpdnrjv usu. at mid. intrant. ; 
to turn out well, cv yiyvopai. 



u. 



Unavoidable, something una- 
voidable, dvdyKrj, r)s, r). 

Unblushing, shameless, dvai- 
o-\vvros, ov. 



Understand, eVtVrapai, emcrrrjo-o- 

pai, r)mo-Trjdr]V. 
Ungraceful, dxdpio~Tos, ov (a priv. 

\dpis). 






146 



ENGLISH -GREEK VOCABULARY. 



Union, fellowship, Koivavla, 

as, r\. 
Unjust towards, ahiKos 7repl 

w. ace; to be unjust, to 

act unjustly, acWco, a>, 770-to; 

an unjust act, dBUnpa, aros, 

TO. 

Unless, edv pr/ w. subjunc; el 
fir/ w. indie, or optat. 



Unnoticed, pass unnoticed, 

dyvotopat, ovpai. rjcropai. 
Unpleasant, Suo-^epr??. es. 
Unrewarded, d^dpiaros, ov. 
Until, coos, eare, (J-^xpi: npiv (usu. 

after negative sentence). 
Use, xpdopai. copai, xpr)o~opai, ixPV' 

o-dp.r)V, Kexprjpai.. 

Utter; see Speak. 



Victorious, to be victorious 

over, viicda), co, rjaco, w. ace. 
Visit, go to, ei'cm/u w. dat. (els, 



Voice, (pcovrj, rjs. rj- 
Voiceless, silent, d<paivos, ov. 
Voluntarily, £ku>v elvai: pi endures 
elvai. 



w. 



Wait, eW^co (eni, e^co) ; linger, 

stay on, dvapevco', stay around, 

7re ptpevco. 
Want, evfteia, as, rj. 
War, noXepos, ov, 6; to carry 

on "war, 7ToXep€a>, co, rjo~a>. 
Water, vbcop, dross to. 
Way, in the way of, ep-noddiv: 

in no way, ovbap&s. 
Wearied out, am wearied out, 

dneip-qKa. 
Weep, bewail, /cXaica, KXavcropai, 

rare nXavo-ovpai, /cXait/aa, and 

Kkaijaa), e/cXavcra, KeicXavpaL and 

later KeicXavo-pai, late iKXavaOnv. 

Trans, or intrans. 
Well, ev; well, honorably, *a- 

\a>s. 
When, in the sense after, eVfiSr), 

w. subjunc. e-rreiddv', at the time 



when, orf. w. subjunc. Srar; at 

the exact time when, tylm, 

W. subjunc. rjv'iKa dv. 
Where, ev&a: the very place 

where, evOa S7. 
While, as long as, ea>s (chiefly ic. 

pr. indie). 
Whip, to whip, to flay, Se'pco, 

fiepco, edeipa. deSappai, eBdprjv. 
Who, what, tIs. n; what sort 

of, nolos. a, ov: of what sort, 

oios. a, ov. 
Will ; see Wish. 
Willing, to be' willing, ideXa. 

eOeXrjaco. T)0e\no-a. rjBeXrjKa. 
Wipe off, d-opaTTCD, £a>. 
Wish, want, j3o(Xopai. ^oikr/ao- 

pai. fiefiovXriuai. eJovXrj&nv. and 

TjrfovXrjdriv: want, to be in 

need of, ask for, Seopxu. Serjao- 



ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY. 



147 



pai, late StnOrjaopai, dedevpai, 
edfrjOrjv. 

With, often expressed by a parli- 
cip., as e^ow; by the side of, 
napd w. dat. ; in company 
with, crvv ic. dat. ; participat- 
ing -with, piera w. gen. 

Withdraw, dnaWdTTopat, £opai 
(alio, dWaTTcj). 

Without food, aaiTos, ov {<t prir. 
alros (>:/<■ 

Without sense, dvonros, ov (a 
prir. vovs). 

Wolf, \vkos, ov, 6. 

Wonder, wonder at, davp.dC<o, 



6avp.do-op.ai iOavpao-a, Te6avpa*.a, 
TtOavpaapai, (Savpdadrjv. 

Word, voice, $6)1/77, 77s, 7). 

Worsted, to be worsted, pclov 

Worthy, d£ios la, toy: worthily, 
d£icoy; deem worthy, d£ioa), 

d). axrco, >r. tj> n. 
Wrangle, diaKplvco (8id, Kpivco). 
Wretched, uOXtos, a ov,also os,ov\ 

in a wretched manner, d0AiW. 
Write, to write a resolution, 

ypdcfia), -yjfoi. 
Wrong, to do wrong, dSiKeo>, a, 

-rja(o. 



Yet, nevertheless, o/io>y: yet, Young man, veavio-nos, ov, 6; the 

still, €Ti: yet, up to this time, youth, the younger men, oi 

7TO) (t'ttchl.). PCOOTtpOt. 

Yield to, obey, ndOopat. 



Zealously, irpoOvpw, to unite in helping zealously, vvoirovh'dfa 



VALUABLE GREEK BOOKS 

PUBLISHED BY 

S. C GRIGGS AXD COMPANY, 

CHICAGO. 



••No better exer leeeeaa be round for rlnttrr in Greek Prose Compo- 
sition, whether In College or the Preparatory School." — ED WARD 
NORTH, L. 11. D., ProfoMor of Greek, Hamilton College, N. Y. 



JONES'S EXERCISES IN GREEK PROSE COMPOSI- 
TION.— With Etel ■kCrrani- 

.1 !;■ I . .- i .in-. M. A., late 
Germany.) I 

Bxtraeti (roan the Preface: prose composition are d 

1 In the mora important principles ol a Fhej 

am also Intend <i to accompany the leading of Xenophoa's anabasis, from which are 
lakes all of th.- \ wij all the examples. Wherever practicable the 

,11. j that, with the dm of th 
style may be Imitated in taming them into Qi tring thorough!) as, eacb 

the fourteenth not - the principles r ef e rr ed to In its own lesson, 

-•. The purpose of this repetition, ne- 
mullai wiih the principal peeollarities 
-miction, that he may be sble to appi 
phun, and also better prep i more advanced stndy of tb 

"it : inlBolenl work in prase oompoaitloo fur admission to 

any Amertcaa college." 

9EQUBI !•> I n I I BOTE, or 

Part II. EXERCISES IN GREEK SYNTAX. By James R. 

Ph. I)., for the ass of Fieslmi i 



OPINIONS OF CLASSICAL SCHOLARS. 

J. B. BewalL P Me.: "'Mi irises' 

been waiting for with Impatience I shall nave this required for admission 

i to you for - inch hrautiful pagea to study from. 

A. BnelateTi Ph. 1>. re, TIL: " The ' Exercises 

in Cr.'i k Prose Composition by P superlatively excellent. They enable 

i.l in- to master Greek syntax with comparative ease, and are a model of ac- 

■ 

Ber. W. B, Tyler, l). l>.. hnaerri CM "I am much 

position' by Prof. Jones. It has the merit 
simplicity an.l clearness, it comprehends a great dial for so small a book. I shall 
have no beshatioD In recommending it highly for a preparatory bonk." 

Ber. Thomas \\\ Tober, A. ML, P t <■ liege, Kg.: " An exceed- 

ingly valuable book, ably an I carefully prepared and well adapted 10 the purpose for which 
it was made. Let the rnxcHsas in our land trxnansTAxn rra merits, and you will have 
for It a a eci latioh." 

r>. L. Cilley, Pref. of Ancient Language*, Phillip's Exeter Academy, N. II.: "I And 
that it works well. It seems better u apted to it.- j>uri> -«■ than any book else which I have 
found." 



Mailed, postage paid, ox receipt of price. 



Publications of S. C. Griggs & Co., Chicago. 

BOISE. — FIRST LESSONS IN GREEK. — Adapted to Hartley's 

Larger and Smaller Greek Grammars, and intended as an Introduction for Xenophon's 
Anabasis. By Jambs R. Boise, Ph. D., Prof, of Greek Language and Lit., University 
of Chicago. Price, 81.25. 

Prof. N. L. Andrews, Madison University, N. Y. : " Your ' First Lessons in Greek' is 
capital. It will, I am sure, have no competitor among those who use Hadley's Grammars." 

Ira W. Pettilmne, 31. A. Beloit College, Wisconsin: " I am perfectly delighted with 
yo ir ' Creek Lessons.' My class, after two terms spent upon it, are reading the Anabasis, I 
think, quite as easily as after a year spent upon anocher introductory book." 

C. TV'. Guernsey, Russell's Collegiate Institute, New Haven, Conn.: "I find Prof. 
Buise's ' Greek Lessons ' wellnigh invaluable in my classes." 



EOISE.— HOMER'S ILIAD. — The First Six Books of Horner's 
Iliad, with Explanatory Notes intended for Beginners in the Epic Dialect : accompa- 
nied with numerous References to Hadley's Greek Grammar, to Kuhner's Larger 
Greek Grammar, and Goodwin's Moods and Tenses. By James R. Boise, of the Uni- 
versity of Chicago. Price, 8 175. 

BE. E. D' Ooge, Prof, of Greek, University of Michigan: "Incomparably superior to 
any other edition of Homer ever published in this country.'' 

W. W. Goodwin, Prof, of Greek, Harvard University : "It is a most valuable con- 
tribution to classical learning, and I trust it will have all the success it most certainly 
deserves." 

W. S. Tyler, D. "D., EE. D„ Prof, of Greek, Amherst College: " I find the Notes just 
what I expecteo, — the right kind in the right places. I am particularly struck with the 
fulness, and yet the brevity and correctness, of the grammatical references and illustrations." 



BOISE & FREEMAN.— SELECTIONS FROM VARIOUS 

GREEK AUTHORS. — For the first year in College, with Explanatory Notes, 
and References to Goodwins Greek Grammar, and to Hadley's Larger and Smaller 
Grammars. Bv James R. Boise, Ph D , and John C. Freeman, M. A., Professors in 
the University "of Chicago. Pages 393. Price, S 2.50. 

Extract from the Preface : " In the preparation of this work two objects 
have b^en aimed at, — a comprehensive view of tbe Greek Language in its principal 
forms, and a general survey of the leading event"; in the history of the Greeks. The authors, 
as well as the events of which they write, are arranged in the* chronological order." 

N. E. Andrews, Prof, of the Greek Language and Literature, Madison University : 
" Boise's ' Selections from Greek Authors ' fulfils the expectations excited by his former 
works, and is admirably adapted to the purposes set forth in the Preface. "■ he interesting 
portions so judiciously chosen from various authors; th notes, calculated as they are to 
encourage the student to do his own work bv wisely lessening its difficulties; and the refer- 
ences to Goodwin's and Hadley's Grammars, combine to recommend the book. Its use for 
a term past with our Freshman CTa-s has tended to increase mt appreciation of its 
MERITS. Typographically, the book is simply beautiful, —a delight to the eye." 

George R. Bliss, Prof, of La' in and Greek, Lewisburg University, Pa.: "I have ex- 
amined this work somewhat carefully, and am so persuaded of its excellence that I have 
decided to adopt it with my classes in'the Freshman year." 

Rev. Jacob Cooper, D. C. E., Prof, of Greek, Bulger's College, N. J. : " After a care- 
ful examination of the ' Selections,' I am satisfied that this book meets a real want in 

COLLEGE '1 he copious notes and references appear to be all that could be desired. 

1 hey show excellent taste in explaining the difficult rather than the easv passages, and give 
references to such authorities as th- student could be expected to possess. In tvpography 
and neatness this book is a model of its kind. I have introduced it in our collegiate 
course." 

A. H. Buck, Prof, of Greek, Boston University : " I found the book so admirable in the 
matter Belecfc-d, in the soundness and accuracv of the annotations, and in the unusual 
excellence of the press-work, that I could do no otherwise than urge its adoption for the 
entering class in the college, and my high opinion of the book has been corroborated bv 
dady use." 

Mailed, postage paid, on receipt of price. 



* 41 QZ 



' J J 












i 



fr - « "3 



.o : 









* ,\ 







- : . - 








"%. V* 












,0 © 






'" % 
^ 









nV 




v • « ^ 

A ' \ 









*P°* 



/ .« 









l< ^ 






-, 









I 






